TW202410492A - Method for manufacturing laminate film - Google Patents

Method for manufacturing laminate film Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW202410492A
TW202410492A TW112128263A TW112128263A TW202410492A TW 202410492 A TW202410492 A TW 202410492A TW 112128263 A TW112128263 A TW 112128263A TW 112128263 A TW112128263 A TW 112128263A TW 202410492 A TW202410492 A TW 202410492A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
light
layer
photosensitive layer
meth
mass
Prior art date
Application number
TW112128263A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
豊岡健太郎
鈴木正弥
Original Assignee
日商富士軟片股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商富士軟片股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商富士軟片股份有限公司
Publication of TW202410492A publication Critical patent/TW202410492A/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B37/00Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding
    • B32B37/14Methods or apparatus for laminating, e.g. by curing or by ultrasonic bonding characterised by the properties of the layers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/02Physical, chemical or physicochemical properties
    • B32B7/023Optical properties
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/095Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having more than one photosensitive layer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/38Treatment before imagewise removal, e.g. prebaking

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a laminate manufacturing method that is able to efficiently manufacture a laminate which includes a plurality of light-emitting elements and in which the leakage of light from adjacent light-emitting elements is suppressed. This laminate manufacturing method has: a step 1 in which a substrate equipped with light-emitting elements, which includes a substrate and a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged on the substrate, and a transfer film, which includes a temporary support body and a photosensitive layer, are bonded to each other such that the surface of the substrate on which the light-emitting elements are arranged faces the surface of the transfer film on the opposite side from the temporary support body, and the light-emitting elements are covered by the photosensitive layer; a step 2 in which the photosensitive layer undergoes pattern exposure; a step 3 in which the exposure photosensitive layer is developed, thereby forming a resin pattern having openings at positions corresponding to the light-emitting elements; and, between the step 1 and the step 2 or between the step 2 and the step 3, a step in which the temporary support body is peeled off.

Description

積層體之製造方法Method for manufacturing a laminate

本發明係有關一種積層體之製造方法。The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a laminate.

近年來,作為下一代顯示元件,進行了具備安裝複數個微小LED晶片之陣列基板之微LED顯示元件(例如,微LED顯示器)的開發。例如,在專利文獻1中揭示了一種利用雷射剝離之微LED的安裝方法及微LED顯示器。In recent years, as a next-generation display element, a micro LED display element (e.g., a micro LED display) having an array substrate on which a plurality of tiny LED chips are mounted has been developed. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a micro LED mounting method and a micro LED display using laser stripping.

[專利文獻1]日本特開2021-163945號公報[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-163945

本發明人等參考專利文獻1的微LED顯示器,製作在基板上配置複數個發光元件(例如,微LED晶片)而成之積層體並對其性能進行了研究,結果明確了存在由於來自相鄰之發光元件的漏光而顯示性能降低之情況。例如,在由具有紅色(R)、綠色(G)及藍色(B)的發光色之各發光元件構成像素之情況下,存在由於相鄰配置之發光元件的漏光而產生光的混色而無法進行所期望的顯示之情況。 依據上述見解,本發明人等明確,對於製造來自相鄰之發光元件的漏光得到抑制之包括複數個發光元件之積層體之方法存在研究之餘地。另外,在積層體之製造方法中,通常亦期待製造時間短(換言之,能夠高效地製造)。 The inventors of the present invention referred to the micro LED display of patent document 1, manufactured a multilayer body in which a plurality of light-emitting elements (e.g., micro LED chips) are arranged on a substrate, and studied its performance. As a result, it was clearly found that there is a situation where the display performance is reduced due to light leakage from adjacent light-emitting elements. For example, in the case where pixels are composed of light-emitting elements having light-emitting colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B), there is a situation where the desired display cannot be performed due to light mixing caused by light leakage from adjacent light-emitting elements. Based on the above insights, the inventors of the present invention clearly found that there is room for research on a method for manufacturing a multilayer body including a plurality of light-emitting elements in which light leakage from adjacent light-emitting elements is suppressed. In addition, in the manufacturing method of the laminate, it is generally expected that the manufacturing time is short (in other words, it can be manufactured efficiently).

因此,本發明的課題為,提供一種積層體之製造方法,其能夠高效地製造來自相鄰之發光元件的漏光得到抑制之包括複數個發光元件之積層體。Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a laminated body that can efficiently manufacture a laminated body including a plurality of light-emitting elements in which leakage of light from adjacent light-emitting elements is suppressed.

本發明人等發現了藉由以下結構能夠解決上述課題。The present inventors found that the above-mentioned problems can be solved by the following structure.

〔1〕一種積層體之製造方法,其具有: 以包括基板和配置於上述基板上之複數個發光元件之帶發光元件之基板的上述發光元件側的表面、與包括臨時支撐體和感光性層之轉印膜的與上述臨時支撐體相反的一側的表面對向且上述發光元件被上述感光性層覆蓋之方式,將上述帶發光元件之基板與上述轉印膜貼合之步驟1; 對上述感光性層進行圖案曝光之步驟2;及 對曝光後之上述感光性層進行顯影,形成在與上述發光元件對應之位置具有開口部之樹脂圖案之步驟3, 在上述步驟1與上述步驟2之間或上述步驟2與上述步驟3之間具有剝離上述臨時支撐體之步驟。 〔2〕如〔1〕所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 上述轉印膜中的上述感光性層的膜厚大於上述發光元件的高度。 〔3〕如〔1〕或〔2〕所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 上述轉印膜中的上述感光性層包含鹼溶樹脂、聚合性化合物及光聚合起始劑。 〔4〕如〔1〕或〔2〕所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 上述轉印膜中的上述感光性層包含聚合物及光酸產生劑。 〔5〕如〔1〕至〔4〕中任一項所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 在上述轉印膜中的上述感光性層中,相對於上述感光性層的總質量,水的含量為5.0質量%以下。 〔6〕如〔1〕至〔5〕中任一項所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 在上述轉印膜中的上述感光性層中,相對於上述感光性層的總質量,有機溶劑的含量為5.0質量%以下。 〔7〕如〔1〕至〔6〕中任一項所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 在上述轉印膜中的上述感光性層中,相對於上述感光性層的總質量,氯化物離子的含量為100質量ppm以下。 〔8〕如〔1〕至〔7〕中任一項所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 上述轉印膜中的上述感光性層包含白色顏料。 〔9〕如〔1〕至〔7〕中任一項所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 上述轉印膜中的上述感光性層從上述臨時支撐體側起依序具有感光性的光吸收層前驅物層和感光性的光反射性層前驅物層。 〔10〕如〔1〕至〔7〕中任一項所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 上述轉印膜中的上述感光性層為感光性的光吸收層前驅物層。 〔11〕如〔1〕至〔7〕中任一項所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 在上述步驟3之後,還具有在上述開口部的側壁配置光反射膜之步驟4。 [發明效果] [1] A method for manufacturing a laminate, comprising: Step 1 of laminating the substrate with light-emitting elements and the transfer film in such a manner that the surface of the substrate with light-emitting elements on the light-emitting element side of the substrate including a substrate and a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged on the substrate faces the surface of the transfer film including a temporary support and a photosensitive layer on the side opposite to the temporary support and the light-emitting elements are covered by the photosensitive layer; Step 2 of pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer; and Step 3 of developing the exposed photosensitive layer to form a resin pattern having an opening at a position corresponding to the light-emitting element, There is a step of peeling off the temporary support between step 1 and step 2 or between step 2 and step 3. 〔2〕A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in 〔1〕, wherein the thickness of the photosensitive layer in the transfer film is greater than the height of the light-emitting element. 〔3〕A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in 〔1〕 or 〔2〕, wherein the photosensitive layer in the transfer film comprises an alkali-soluble resin, a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator. 〔4〕A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in 〔1〕 or 〔2〕, wherein the photosensitive layer in the transfer film comprises a polymer and a photoacid generator. [5] A method for producing a laminate as described in any one of [1] to [4], wherein In the photosensitive layer in the transfer film, the content of water is 5.0 mass % or less relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. [6] A method for producing a laminate as described in any one of [1] to [5], wherein In the photosensitive layer in the transfer film, the content of an organic solvent is 5.0 mass % or less relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. [7] A method for producing a laminate as described in any one of [1] to [6], wherein In the photosensitive layer in the transfer film, the content of chloride ions is 100 mass ppm or less relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. [8] A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in any one of [1] to [7], wherein the photosensitive layer in the transfer film contains a white pigment. [9] A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in any one of [1] to [7], wherein the photosensitive layer in the transfer film has a photosensitive light absorbing layer precursor layer and a photosensitive light reflecting layer precursor layer in order from the side of the temporary support body. [10] A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in any one of [1] to [7], wherein the photosensitive layer in the transfer film is a photosensitive light absorbing layer precursor layer. [11] A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in any one of [1] to [7], wherein after step 3, there is also a step 4 of configuring a light reflecting film on the side wall of the opening. [Effect of the invention]

依據本發明,能夠提供一種積層體之製造方法,其能夠高效地製造來自相鄰之發光元件的漏光得到抑制之包括複數個發光元件之積層體。According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a laminated body that can efficiently manufacture a laminated body including a plurality of light-emitting elements in which light leakage from adjacent light-emitting elements is suppressed.

以下,對本發明詳細地進行說明。 在本說明書中,使用“~”表示之數值範圍係指將記載於“~”前後之數值作為下限值及上限值而包括之範圍。 在本說明書中階段性地記載之數值範圍內,以某一數值範圍記載之上限值或下限值可以被替換成其他階段性記載之數值範圍的上限值或下限值。又,在本說明書中記載之數值範圍內,以某一數值範圍記載之上限值或下限值亦可以被替換成實施例所示之值。 The present invention is described in detail below. In this specification, the numerical range represented by "~" refers to a range that includes the numerical values recorded before and after "~" as the lower limit and upper limit. In the numerical range recorded in stages in this specification, the upper limit or lower limit recorded in a certain numerical range can be replaced by the upper limit or lower limit of another numerical range recorded in stages. In addition, in the numerical range recorded in this specification, the upper limit or lower limit recorded in a certain numerical range can also be replaced by the value shown in the embodiment.

在本說明書中,術語“步驟”不僅包括獨立之步驟,即使在無法與其他步驟明確地區分之情況下,只要可達成該步驟的預期目的,則亦包括在本術語中。In this specification, the term "step" includes not only independent steps, but also steps that cannot be clearly distinguished from other steps as long as the intended purpose of the step can be achieved.

在本說明書中,只要沒有特別指定,則重量平均分子量(Mw)及數量平均分子量(Mn)為作為管柱而使用TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL或TSKgel G2000HxL(均為TOSOH CORPORATION製造的商品名)、作為洗提液而使用THF(四氫呋喃)、作為檢測器而使用示差折射計及作為標準物質而使用聚苯乙烯並利用凝膠滲透層析(GPC)分析裝置測量之使用標準物質的聚苯乙烯換算之值。 又,在本說明書中,只要沒有特別指定,則具有分子量分佈之化合物的分子量為重量平均分子量(Mw)。 在本說明書中,只要沒有特別指定,則金屬元素的含量為使用感應偶合電漿(ICP:Inductively Coupled Plasma)光譜分析裝置而測量之值。 在本說明書中,只要沒有特別指定,則色相為使用色差計(CR-221,Minolta Co.,Ltd.製造)測量之值。 In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) are values converted to polystyrene using a standard substance measured by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer using TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL or TSKgel G2000HxL (all trade names manufactured by TOSOH CORPORATION) as a column, THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent, a differential refractometer as a detector, and polystyrene as a standard substance. In addition, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, the molecular weight of a compound having a molecular weight distribution is the weight average molecular weight (Mw). In this manual, unless otherwise specified, the content of metal elements is the value measured using an inductively coupled plasma (ICP: Inductively Coupled Plasma) spectrometer. In this manual, unless otherwise specified, the hue is the value measured using a colorimeter (CR-221, manufactured by Minolta Co., Ltd.).

在本說明書中,“(甲基)丙烯酸”為包含丙烯酸及甲基丙烯酸這兩者之概念,“(甲基)丙烯醯基”為包含丙烯醯基及甲基丙烯醯基這兩者之概念,“(甲基)丙烯酸酯”為包含丙烯酸酯及甲基丙烯酸酯這兩者之概念。In this specification, "(meth)acrylic acid" is a concept including both acrylic acid and methacrylic acid, and "(meth)acrylyl group" is a concept including both acrylic acid group and methacrylic acid group. , "(meth)acrylate" is a concept that includes both acrylate and methacrylate.

另外,本說明書中,“鹼溶性”係指,相對於液溫為22℃之1質量%碳酸鈉水溶液100g的溶解度為0.1g以上。因此,例如,鹼溶性樹脂係指滿足上述溶解度條件之樹脂。In addition, in this specification, "alkali solubility" means that the solubility with respect to 100g of 1 mass % sodium carbonate aqueous solutions with a liquid temperature of 22 degreeC is 0.1g or more. Therefore, for example, an alkali-soluble resin refers to a resin that satisfies the above-mentioned solubility conditions.

在本說明書中,“水溶性”係指,在液溫為22℃的pH7.0的水100g中的溶解度為0.1g以上。因此,例如,水溶性樹脂係指滿足上述溶解度條件之樹脂。In this specification, "water-soluble" means that the solubility in 100 g of water at a pH of 7.0 at a liquid temperature of 22° C. is 0.1 g or more. Therefore, for example, a water-soluble resin refers to a resin that satisfies the above solubility condition.

在本說明書中,組成物的“固體成分”係指形成使用組成物形成之組成物層之成分,在組成物包含溶劑(有機溶劑、水等)之情況下,係指除溶劑以外的所有成分。又,若為形成組成物層之成分,則液體狀的成分亦視為固體成分。In this specification, the "solid component" of a composition refers to the component that forms the composition layer formed using the composition, and when the composition contains a solvent (organic solvent, water, etc.), it refers to all components other than the solvent. In addition, if it is a component that forms the composition layer, the liquid component is also regarded as a solid component.

在本說明書中,“透明”係指波長400~700nm的可見光的平均透射率為80%以上,90%以上為較佳。因此,“透明層”係指波長400~700nm的可見光的平均透射率為80%以上之層。對於平均透射率,每1nm測量直線透射光。 在本說明書中,可見光的平均透射率為使用分光光度計在25℃測量之值,例如能夠使用Hitachi, Ltd.製造的分光光度計U-3310進行測量。 In this specification, "transparent" means that the average transmittance of visible light with a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is 80% or more, preferably 90% or more. Therefore, a "transparent layer" refers to a layer with an average transmittance of visible light with a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm of 80% or more. For the average transmittance, the straight-line transmitted light is measured every 1 nm. In this specification, the average transmittance of visible light is a value measured at 25°C using a spectrophotometer, such as the spectrophotometer U-3310 manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.

又,在本說明書中,只要沒有特別說明,各層(例如,感光性層、光反射層前驅物層及光吸收層前驅物層)的厚度是使用了利用SEM(掃描型電子顯微鏡)或TEM(透射型電子顯微鏡)觀察藉由切片機切斷之剖面並在10個點計測之厚度的平均值之值。其中,厚度為1μm以上者利用SEM測量,厚度小於1μm者利用TEM測量。In addition, in this specification, unless otherwise specified, the thickness of each layer (for example, the photosensitive layer, the light reflecting layer precursor layer and the light absorbing layer precursor layer) is measured using SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope) or TEM ( Transmission electron microscope) The average value of the thickness measured at 10 points by observing the section cut by a microtome. Among them, those with a thickness of 1 μm or more are measured by SEM, and those with a thickness of less than 1 μm are measured by TEM.

又,在本說明書中,只要沒有特別說明,折射率係指依據遵照橢圓偏光法之測量裝置在25℃測量之波長550nm下的折射率。In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the refractive index refers to the refractive index at a wavelength of 550 nm measured at 25°C using a measuring device in accordance with the elliptical polarization method.

[積層體之製造方法] 本發明的積層體之製造方法具有: 以包括基板和配置於上述基板上之複數個發光元件之帶發光元件之基板的上述發光元件側的表面、與包括臨時支撐體和感光性層之轉印膜的與上述臨時支撐體相反的一側的表面對向且上述發光元件被上述感光性層覆蓋之方式,將上述帶發光元件之基板與上述轉印膜貼合之步驟1; 對上述感光性層進行圖案曝光之步驟2;及 對曝光後之上述感光性層進行顯影,形成在與上述發光元件對應之位置具有開口部之樹脂圖案之步驟3, 在上述步驟1與上述步驟2之間或上述步驟2與上述步驟3之間具有剝離上述臨時支撐體之步驟。 [Manufacturing method of laminated body] The manufacturing method of the laminated body of the present invention includes: A surface of a light-emitting element side of a substrate with a light-emitting element including a substrate and a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged on the substrate, and a transfer film including a temporary support and a photosensitive layer opposite to the temporary support The step 1 of laminating the above-mentioned substrate with the light-emitting element and the above-mentioned transfer film in such a manner that the surfaces on both sides face each other and the above-mentioned light-emitting element is covered by the above-mentioned photosensitive layer; Step 2 of pattern-exposing the above-mentioned photosensitive layer; and Step 3 of developing the exposed photosensitive layer to form a resin pattern having openings at positions corresponding to the light-emitting elements, There is a step of peeling off the temporary support between the above step 1 and the above step 2 or between the above step 2 and the above step 3.

依據具有上述結構之本發明的積層體之製造方法,藉由使用轉印膜之光刻,能夠高效地製造具備配置有複數個發光元件之帶發光元件之基板和在上述帶發光元件之基板上配置於各發光元件的周圍之隔壁層而成之積層體。藉由上述製造方法得到之積層體在各發光元件的周圍具備隔壁層,因此相鄰之發光元件的漏光得到抑制。 又,例如與藉由使用轉印膜之光刻,在基板上的配置發光元件之預定位置預先形成隔壁層(亦即,形成在配置於發光元件之預定位置具有開口之樹脂圖案),然後在既定位置配置發光元件之製造方法相比,本發明的積層體之製造方法能夠大幅縮短製造時間。 作為藉由本發明的積層體之製造方法得到之積層體的用途,例如可舉出微LED顯示元件等。 According to the manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention having the above structure, by using photolithography of a transfer film, a substrate with light-emitting elements on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are arranged and a laminate formed by a partition layer arranged around each light-emitting element on the substrate with light-emitting elements can be efficiently manufactured. The laminate obtained by the above manufacturing method has a partition layer around each light-emitting element, so that light leakage of adjacent light-emitting elements is suppressed. In addition, compared with a manufacturing method in which a partition layer is pre-formed at a predetermined position on a substrate where a light-emitting element is arranged (that is, a resin pattern having an opening is formed at a predetermined position where a light-emitting element is arranged) by photolithography using a transfer film, and then a light-emitting element is arranged at a predetermined position, the manufacturing method of the laminate of the present invention can significantly shorten the manufacturing time. As an example of the use of the laminate obtained by the laminate manufacturing method of the present invention, micro LED display elements can be cited.

另外,以下在藉由本發明的積層體之製造方法得到之積層體中,有時將能夠進一步抑制相鄰之發光元件的漏光及/或本發明的積層體之製造方法的效率更優異亦稱為“本發明的效果更優異”。In addition, in the following, in the laminated body obtained by the manufacturing method of the laminated body of the present invention, it may be said that the light leakage of adjacent light-emitting elements can be further suppressed and/or the efficiency of the manufacturing method of the laminated body of the present invention is more excellent. "The effect of the present invention is even better."

以下,參照圖式,對本發明的積層體之製造方法進行說明。 〔第1實施形態〕 本發明的積層體之製造方法的第1實施形態(以下,亦簡稱為“本發明的第1實施形態”。)具有下述步驟(1-1)~(1-3)。 The following describes the method for manufacturing a laminate of the present invention with reference to the drawings. [First embodiment] The first embodiment of the method for manufacturing a laminate of the present invention (hereinafter, also referred to as "the first embodiment of the present invention") comprises the following steps (1-1) to (1-3).

・步驟(1-1)(貼合步驟):以包括基板和配置於上述基板上之複數個發光元件之帶發光元件之基板的上述發光元件側的表面、與包括臨時支撐體和感光性層之轉印膜的與上述臨時支撐體相反的一側的表面對向且上述發光元件被上述感光性層覆蓋之方式,將上述帶發光元件之基板與上述轉印膜貼合之步驟 ・步驟(1-2)(曝光步驟):對上述感光性層進行圖案曝光之步驟 ・步驟(1-3)(顯影步驟):對曝光後之上述感光性層進行顯影,形成在與上述發光元件對應之位置具有開口部之樹脂圖案之步驟 此外,本發明的第1實施形態在步驟(1-1)與步驟(1-2)或步驟(1-2)與步驟(1-3)之間具有以下步驟(1-A)。 ・步驟(1-A)(臨時支撐體剝離步驟):剝離臨時支撐體之步驟。 ・Step (1-1) (bonding step): a step of bonding the substrate with light-emitting elements and the transfer film in such a manner that the surface of the substrate with light-emitting elements on the light-emitting element side of the substrate including a substrate and a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged on the substrate faces the surface of the transfer film including a temporary support and a photosensitive layer on the side opposite to the temporary support and the light-emitting elements are covered by the photosensitive layer ・Step (1-2) (exposure step): a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer ・Step (1-3) (development step): a step of developing the exposed photosensitive layer to form a resin pattern having an opening at a position corresponding to the light-emitting element In addition, the first embodiment of the present invention has the following step (1-A) between step (1-1) and step (1-2) or between step (1-2) and step (1-3). ・Step (1-A) (temporary support body peeling step): a step of peeling off the temporary support body.

<<步驟(1-1),貼合步驟>> 步驟(1-1)為以包括基板和配置於上述基板上之複數個發光元件之帶發光元件之基板的上述發光元件側的表面、與包括臨時支撐體和感光性層之轉印膜的與上述臨時支撐體相反的一側的表面對向且上述發光元件被上述感光性層覆蓋之方式,將上述帶發光元件之基板與上述轉印膜貼合之步驟。 參照圖1,對步驟(1-1)的具體的順序進行說明。 在步驟(1-1)中,將帶發光元件之基板10與轉印膜20以帶發光元件之基板10的與基板12側相反的一側的表面(亦即,具有發光元件14之一側的表面)、與轉印膜20的與臨時支撐體22相反的一側的表面(亦即,感光性層24側的表面)對向之方式貼合。另外,圖1示出帶發光元件之基板10與轉印膜20貼合後的狀態。 <<Step (1-1), bonding step>> Step (1-1) is a step of bonding the substrate with light-emitting elements to the transfer film in such a manner that the surface of the substrate with light-emitting elements on the light-emitting element side of the substrate including a substrate and a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged on the substrate faces the surface of the transfer film including a temporary support and a photosensitive layer on the side opposite to the temporary support and the light-emitting elements are covered by the photosensitive layer. The specific sequence of step (1-1) is described with reference to FIG. 1. In step (1-1), the substrate 10 with the light-emitting element and the transfer film 20 are bonded together in such a manner that the surface of the substrate 10 with the light-emitting element opposite to the substrate 12 (i.e., the surface having the light-emitting element 14) and the surface of the transfer film 20 opposite to the temporary support 22 (i.e., the surface on the photosensitive layer 24 side) face each other. In addition, FIG. 1 shows the state after the substrate 10 with the light-emitting element and the transfer film 20 are bonded together.

又,就貼合步驟中發光元件容易被感光性層覆蓋之觀點及本發明的效果更容易變得優異的觀點而言,轉印膜中的感光性層的厚度大於發光元件的高度為較佳。在此,發光元件的高度係指,以帶發光元件之基板中的未配置發光元件之部位的基板表面為基準面時的、在該基準面的法線方向上的發光元件的厚度。亦即,在圖1所示之積層體之情況下,發光元件14的高度係指,以帶發光元件之基板10中的未配置發光元件14之部位的基板表面12A為基準面時的、基準面12A的法線方向上的發光元件14的厚度T1。In addition, from the viewpoint that the light-emitting element is easily covered with the photosensitive layer in the bonding step and the effect of the present invention is more likely to be excellent, the thickness of the photosensitive layer in the transfer film is preferably greater than the height of the light-emitting element. . Here, the height of the light-emitting element refers to the thickness of the light-emitting element in the normal direction of the reference plane, using the surface of the substrate in a portion of the substrate with the light-emitting element where the light-emitting element is not arranged as the reference plane. That is, in the case of the laminated body shown in FIG. 1 , the height of the light-emitting element 14 refers to the base surface 12A of the substrate 10 with the light-emitting element in the portion where the light-emitting element 14 is not arranged. The thickness T1 of the light-emitting element 14 in the normal direction of the surface 12A.

當轉印膜具有後述之保護膜時,在剝離保護膜之後實施貼合步驟為較佳。When the transfer film has a protective film as described below, it is preferred to perform the laminating step after peeling off the protective film.

貼合時,使轉印膜的與臨時支撐體側相反的一側的表面與帶發光元件之基板的發光元件側的表面接觸並壓接為較佳。 作為壓接方法,例如可舉出公知的轉印方法及層壓方法,將轉印膜的與臨時支撐體側相反的一側的表面重疊於帶發光元件之基板的發光元件側的表面來進行基於輥等之加壓及加熱之方法為較佳。 作為貼合方法,例如可舉出使用真空層壓機及自動切割層壓機等公知的層壓機之方法。 作為層壓溫度,70~130℃為較佳。 During lamination, it is preferable to bring the surface of the transfer film on the side opposite to the temporary support side into contact with the surface of the light-emitting element side of the substrate with the light-emitting element and press-bond them. Examples of the pressure-bonding method include known transfer methods and lamination methods, in which the surface of the transfer film on the side opposite to the temporary support side is overlapped with the surface of the substrate with the light-emitting element on the side of the light-emitting element. The method of applying pressure and heating using rollers or the like is preferred. Examples of the laminating method include a method using a known laminator such as a vacuum laminator and an automatic cutting laminator. The lamination temperature is preferably 70 to 130°C.

<帶發光元件之基板> 帶發光元件之基板具有基板和配置於基板上之複數個發光元件。 作為基板,例如可舉出樹脂基板、玻璃基板、陶瓷基板及半導體基板。 作為樹脂基板的材料,可舉出聚對酞酸乙二酯系樹脂、聚對酞酸萘二酯系樹脂、環烯烴系樹脂、聚醯亞胺系樹脂、聚碳酸酯系樹脂、聚丙烯酸酯系樹脂、聚醚碸系樹脂、矽酮系樹脂及環氧系樹脂等。 作為樹脂基板的厚度,5~200μm為較佳,10~100μm為更佳。 作為基板,考慮到曝光步驟(步驟(1-2)),透明基板為較佳。 作為透明基板,例如可舉出樹脂基板(例如,樹脂膜)及玻璃基板。樹脂基板為透射可見光之樹脂基板為較佳。作為透射可見光之樹脂基板的較佳成分,例如可舉出聚醯胺系樹脂、聚對酞酸乙二酯系樹脂、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯系樹脂、環烯烴系樹脂、聚醯亞胺系樹脂及聚碳酸酯系樹脂。 作為透明基板,其中,聚醯胺膜、聚對酞酸乙二酯膜、環烯烴聚合物、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯膜、聚醯亞胺膜或聚碳酸酯膜為較佳,聚對酞酸乙二酯膜為更佳。 透明基板的厚度不受限制。透明基板的厚度為10~200μm為較佳,20~120μm為更佳,20~100μm為進一步較佳。 <Substrate with light-emitting element> The substrate with light-emitting elements includes a substrate and a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged on the substrate. Examples of the substrate include resin substrates, glass substrates, ceramic substrates, and semiconductor substrates. Examples of the material of the resin substrate include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polynaphthalene terephthalate resin, cycloolefin resin, polyimide resin, polycarbonate resin, and polyacrylate. resin, polyether resin, silicone resin, epoxy resin, etc. The thickness of the resin substrate is preferably 5 to 200 μm, and more preferably 10 to 100 μm. As the substrate, a transparent substrate is preferable in view of the exposure step (step (1-2)). Examples of the transparent substrate include a resin substrate (for example, a resin film) and a glass substrate. The resin substrate is preferably a resin substrate that transmits visible light. Preferable components of the resin substrate that transmits visible light include, for example, polyamide resins, polyethylene terephthalate resins, polyethylene naphthalate resins, cycloolefin resins, and polyimides. resin and polycarbonate resin. As the transparent substrate, polyamide film, polyethylene terephthalate film, cyclic olefin polymer, polyethylene naphthalate film, polyimide film or polycarbonate film are preferred. Polyethylene terephthalate film is preferred. Ethylene phthalate film is better. The thickness of the transparent substrate is not limited. The thickness of the transparent substrate is preferably 10 to 200 μm, more preferably 20 to 120 μm, and further preferably 20 to 100 μm.

作為基板,具有電極及引出配線中的至少一者之基板亦較佳。 電極由ITO(氧化銦錫)及IZO(氧化銦鋅)等金屬氧化膜以及金屬網及金屬奈米線等金屬細線構成為較佳。 作為金屬細線,例如可舉出銀及銅等金屬細線,銀網及銀奈米線等銀導電性材料為較佳。 As a substrate, a substrate having at least one of an electrode and a lead wiring is also preferred. The electrode is preferably composed of a metal oxide film such as ITO (indium tin oxide) and IZO (indium zinc oxide) and a metal fine wire such as a metal mesh and a metal nanowire. As the metal fine wire, for example, metal fine wires such as silver and copper can be cited, and silver conductive materials such as a silver mesh and a silver nanowire are preferred.

作為引出配線的材質,金屬為較佳。 作為上述金屬,例如可舉出金、銀、銅、鉬、鋁、鈦、鉻、鋅及錳以及組合該等而成之合金,銅、鉬、鋁或鈦為較佳,銅為更佳。 Metal is preferred as the material for lead wiring. As the above-mentioned metal, for example, gold, silver, copper, molybdenum, aluminum, titanium, chromium, zinc and manganese and alloys thereof can be cited, copper, molybdenum, aluminum or titanium is preferred, and copper is more preferred.

作為發光元件,可舉出微LED晶片。 在帶發光元件之基板中,對於複數個發光元件的配置形態,不受特別限制。作為複數個發光元件的配置形態,例如可舉出在基板上設置複數個單元(例如,相當於1個像素或1個pixel。),在該單元內將具有紅色(R)、綠色(G)及藍色(B)的發光色之各發光元件各配置(例如,各配置1個、2個、3個)N個之形態。作為單元的形狀,不受特別限制,例如可舉出格子狀等形狀。又,單元內的各發光元件的配置方法(例如,線性陣列)不受特別限制。另外,作為發光元件的發光色的一例舉出了R、G、B,但發光元件只要發光則不受特別限制,其發光色能夠適當選擇。 另外,發光元件通常具有用於與外部電極連接的端子。 As a light-emitting element, a micro LED chip can be cited. In a substrate with a light-emitting element, there is no special restriction on the configuration of a plurality of light-emitting elements. As a configuration of a plurality of light-emitting elements, for example, a plurality of units (for example, equivalent to 1 pixel or 1 pixel) are provided on the substrate, and each light-emitting element having a light-emitting color of red (R), green (G) and blue (B) is configured in each unit (for example, 1, 2, 3 each) N forms. As the shape of the unit, there is no special restriction, for example, a grid shape can be cited. In addition, the configuration method of each light-emitting element in the unit (for example, a linear array) is not particularly restricted. In addition, R, G, and B are cited as an example of the light-emitting color of the light-emitting element, but the light-emitting element is not particularly restricted as long as it emits light, and its light-emitting color can be appropriately selected. In addition, the light-emitting element usually has a terminal for connecting to an external electrode.

在發光元件為微LED晶片之情況下,作為LED的種類,可以為在可見光區域具有峰波長之LED(以下亦稱為“可見光LED”。),亦可以為在紫外光區域具有峰波長之LED(以下亦稱為“UV-LED”。)。When the light-emitting element is a micro LED chip, the type of LED may be an LED having a peak wavelength in the visible light region (hereinafter also referred to as a "visible light LED"), or an LED having a peak wavelength in the ultraviolet light region (hereinafter also referred to as a "UV-LED").

<轉印膜> 作為步驟(1-1)中能夠使用之轉印膜,在後段部進行說明。 <Transfer film> The transfer film that can be used in step (1-1) will be described in the later section.

<<步驟(1-2),曝光步驟>> 曝光步驟為圖案曝光感光性層之步驟。 “圖案曝光”係指曝光成圖案狀之形態,並且係指存在曝光部和非曝光部之形態的曝光。 能夠適當調整圖案曝光中的曝光部(曝光區域)與非曝光部(非曝光區域)的位置關係。 曝光方向可以從感光性層側或與感光性層側相反的一側(基板側)曝光。 典型地,曝光步驟為隔著光罩進行圖案曝光之步驟。在曝光步驟中,光罩與作為被感光物之積層體可以接觸,亦可以不接觸。 <<Step (1-2), exposure step>> The exposure step is a step of exposing the photosensitive layer in a pattern. "Pattern exposure" means exposure in a pattern-like form, and means exposure in a form in which exposed portions and non-exposed portions exist. The positional relationship between the exposed portion (exposed area) and the non-exposed portion (non-exposed area) during pattern exposure can be appropriately adjusted. The exposure direction may be from the photosensitive layer side or the side opposite to the photosensitive layer side (substrate side). Typically, the exposure step is a step of pattern exposure through a photomask. In the exposure step, the photomask and the laminated body as the photosensitive object may or may not be in contact.

當在貼合步驟與曝光步驟之間進行了後述之臨時支撐體剝離步驟時,作為曝光步驟,使臨時支撐體剝離步驟中得到之臨時支撐體已被剝離之積層體的與基板側相反的一側的表面與光罩接觸而進行圖案曝光之曝光步驟為較佳。換言之,使剝離了臨時支撐體之積層體的藉由剝離臨時支撐體而露出之表面(感光性層的表面等)與光罩接觸,對感光性層進行圖案曝光之曝光步驟為較佳。When the temporary support peeling step described below is performed between the bonding step and the exposure step, as the exposure step, the side of the laminated body from which the temporary support has been peeled off, which is obtained in the temporary support peeling step, is opposite to the substrate side. The exposure step is preferably to perform pattern exposure by contacting the surface of the side with the photomask. In other words, the exposure step is preferably to bring the surface of the laminated body from which the temporary support has been peeled off and which is exposed by peeling off the temporary support (the surface of the photosensitive layer, etc.) into contact with the photomask to pattern-expose the photosensitive layer.

在感光性層為負型感光性層之情況下,藉由經過進行圖案曝光之曝光步驟,在曝光區域(相當於光罩的開口部之區域)中能夠產生感光性層中包含之成分的硬化反應。藉由在曝光後實施顯影步驟(步驟(1-3)),去除感光性層的非曝光區域來形成圖案。在曝光步驟中,以在顯影步驟(步驟(1-3))後能夠在與發光元件對應之位置形成具有既定開口之樹脂圖案之方式,使用具有相當於配置有發光元件之位置之部分為非開口部、相當於與相鄰之發光元件間對應之位置(換言之,形成隔壁層之位置)之部分為開口部之圖案之光罩來實施曝光步驟即可。藉由上述曝光步驟,能夠依據光罩的圖案形狀對感光性層進行曝光。另外,在圖2中示出感光性層為負型感光性層時的圖案曝光步驟。在圖2的積層體中,在光罩30的開口部(曝光區域)中,能夠產生感光性層24中包含之成分的硬化反應。另一方面,藉由在曝光後實施顯影步驟(步驟(1-3))來去除光罩30的非開口部(非曝光區域)的感光性層。When the photosensitive layer is a negative photosensitive layer, hardening of the components contained in the photosensitive layer can occur in the exposure area (the area corresponding to the opening of the mask) through the exposure step of performing pattern exposure. reaction. By performing a development step (step (1-3)) after exposure, the non-exposed area of the photosensitive layer is removed to form a pattern. In the exposure step, it is not appropriate to use a portion corresponding to the position where the light-emitting element is arranged so that a resin pattern having a predetermined opening can be formed at a position corresponding to the light-emitting element after the development step (step (1-3)). The exposure step can be performed using a mask with a pattern of the opening, corresponding to the position corresponding to the adjacent light-emitting elements (in other words, the position where the barrier layer is formed). Through the above-mentioned exposure step, the photosensitive layer can be exposed according to the pattern shape of the photomask. In addition, FIG. 2 shows the pattern exposure step when the photosensitive layer is a negative photosensitive layer. In the laminated body of FIG. 2 , a curing reaction of the components contained in the photosensitive layer 24 can occur in the opening (exposure area) of the photomask 30 . On the other hand, the photosensitive layer in the non-opening portion (non-exposed area) of the photomask 30 is removed by performing a development step (step (1-3)) after exposure.

另一方面,在感光性層為正型感光性層之情況下,在曝光區域(相當於光罩的開口部之區域)中可能發生感光性層中包含之成分的結構變化,藉由在曝光後實施顯影步驟(步驟(1-3)),去除感光性層的曝光區域,從而形成圖案。亦即,藉由在曝光區域中感光性層中包含之成分發生結構變化,在曝光區域與非曝光區域之間產生對顯影液的溶解對比度,其結果,藉由曝光後的顯影步驟(步驟(1-3))去除感光性層的曝光區域,從而形成圖案。 在曝光步驟中,以在顯影步驟(步驟(1-3))後能夠在與發光元件對應之位置形成具有既定開口之樹脂圖案之方式,使用具有相當於配置於有發光元件之位置之部分為開口部、相當於與相鄰之發光元件間對應之位置(換言之,形成隔壁層之位置)之部分為非開口部之圖案之光罩來實施曝光步驟即可。藉由上述曝光步驟,能夠依據光罩的圖案形狀對感光性層進行曝光。 On the other hand, when the photosensitive layer is a positive photosensitive layer, a structural change of the components contained in the photosensitive layer may occur in the exposure area (the area corresponding to the opening of the mask), and the exposed area of the photosensitive layer is removed by performing a development step (step (1-3)) after exposure, thereby forming a pattern. That is, by the structural change of the components contained in the photosensitive layer in the exposure area, a solubility contrast in the developer is generated between the exposure area and the non-exposure area, and as a result, the exposed area of the photosensitive layer is removed by the development step (step (1-3)) after exposure, thereby forming a pattern. In the exposure step, a resin pattern having a predetermined opening can be formed at a position corresponding to the light-emitting element after the development step (step (1-3)). The exposure step can be performed using a mask having a pattern in which the portion corresponding to the position where the light-emitting element is arranged is an opening portion, and the portion corresponding to the position corresponding to the adjacent light-emitting element (in other words, the position where the partition layer is formed) is a non-opening portion. By the above exposure step, the photosensitive layer can be exposed according to the pattern shape of the mask.

本發明的積層體之製造方法在曝光步驟與顯影處理之間具有剝離在曝光步驟中使用之光罩之光罩剝離步驟亦較佳。 作為光罩剝離步驟,例如可舉出公知的剝離步驟。 The method for manufacturing a laminated body of the present invention preferably includes a mask peeling step for peeling off the mask used in the exposure step between the exposure step and the development process. Examples of the mask peeling step include known peeling steps.

作為圖案曝光的光源,例如若能夠照射可使感光性層硬化之波長區域的光(例如,365nm及405nm),則能夠適當選擇而使用。其中,曝光的曝光光的主波長為365nm為較佳。另外,主波長係指強度最高的波長。As a light source for pattern exposure, for example, if it can irradiate light in a wavelength range that can harden the photosensitive layer (for example, 365 nm and 405 nm), it can be appropriately selected and used. Among them, it is preferable that the dominant wavelength of the exposure light is 365nm. In addition, the dominant wavelength refers to the wavelength with the highest intensity.

作為光源,例如可舉出各種雷射、發光二極體(LED)、超高壓水銀燈、高壓水銀燈及金屬鹵化物燈。 作為曝光量,5~200mJ/cm 2為較佳,10~200mJ/cm 2為更佳。 作為用於曝光之光源、曝光量及曝光方法的較佳態樣,例如國際公開第2018/155193號的[0146]~[0147]段中有記載,該等內容被編入本說明書中。 Examples of light sources include various lasers, light-emitting diodes (LEDs), ultra-high-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, and metal halide lamps. As the exposure amount, 5 to 200 mJ/cm 2 is preferred, and 10 to 200 mJ/cm 2 is more preferred. Preferred aspects of the light source, exposure amount, and exposure method used for exposure are described in, for example, paragraphs [0146] to [0147] of International Publication No. 2018/155193, and these contents are incorporated into this specification.

又,經過顯影步驟(步驟(1-3))得到之樹脂圖案的剖面(垂直於基板的剖面)為錐狀亦較佳。又,具體而言,樹脂圖案形成有開口部的開口面積從基板側向其相反側擴大之開口部為較佳。 在感光性層為負型感光性層之情況下,例如藉由將光散亂板導入到曝光機及從傾斜方向照射曝光光等方法,能夠將樹脂圖案的剖面形狀設為錐狀。 在樹脂圖案的剖面為錐狀之情況下,作為開口部的側壁與帶發光元件之基板中的未配置發光元件之基板面所成之角度(“錐角度”。具體而言,相當於圖3中的角度θ。),小於90°為較佳,10~80°為更佳,15~80°為進一步較佳,20~80°為特佳,40~60°為最佳。 Furthermore, it is also preferred that the cross section (cross section perpendicular to the substrate) of the resin pattern obtained after the development step (step (1-3)) is tapered. Furthermore, more specifically, it is preferred that the resin pattern has an opening portion whose opening area expands from the substrate side toward the opposite side. In the case where the photosensitive layer is a negative photosensitive layer, the cross section of the resin pattern can be set to a tapered shape by, for example, introducing a light scattering plate into an exposure machine and irradiating exposure light from an oblique direction. When the cross section of the resin pattern is tapered, the angle between the side wall of the opening and the substrate surface of the substrate with the light-emitting element where the light-emitting element is not arranged ("taper angle". Specifically, it is equivalent to the angle θ in Figure 3.) is preferably less than 90°, 10 to 80° is more preferably, 15 to 80° is further preferably, 20 to 80° is particularly preferably, and 40 to 60° is the best.

<<步驟(1-A),臨時支撐體剝離步驟>> 在貼合步驟與曝光步驟之間或曝光步驟與顯影步驟之間進行臨時支撐體剝離步驟。 其中,在上述貼合步驟與上述曝光步驟之間具有剝離步驟為更佳。 剝離步驟為從轉印膜與帶發光元件之基板的積層體剝離臨時支撐體之步驟。 作為臨時支撐體的剝離方法,例如可舉出公知的剝離方法。具體而言,可舉出日本特開2010-072589號公報的[0161]~[0162]段中記載之覆蓋膜剝離機構。 <<Step (1-A), temporary support peeling step>> The temporary support peeling step is performed between the bonding step and the exposure step or between the exposure step and the development step. Among them, it is more preferable to have a peeling step between the above-mentioned bonding step and the above-mentioned exposure step. The peeling step is a step of peeling off the temporary support from the laminate of the transfer film and the substrate with the light-emitting element. As a peeling method of a temporary support, a well-known peeling method is mentioned, for example. Specific examples include the cover film peeling mechanism described in paragraphs [0161] to [0162] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-072589.

<<步驟(1-3),顯影步驟>> 顯影步驟為使用顯影液對曝光之感光性層進行顯影來形成樹脂圖案之步驟。 作為顯影液,鹼性水溶液為較佳。作為鹼性水溶液中可包含之鹼性化合物,例如可舉出氫氧化鈉、氫氧化鉀、碳酸鈉、炭酸鉀、碳酸氫鈉、碳酸氫鉀、氫氧化四甲基銨、氫氧化四乙銨、氫氧化四丙基銨、氫氧化四丁基銨及膽鹼(2-羥乙基三甲基氫氧化銨)。 <<Step (1-3), development step>> The development step is a step of developing the exposed photosensitive layer using a developer to form a resin pattern. As the developer, an alkaline aqueous solution is preferred. Examples of the alkaline compound that may be included in the alkaline aqueous solution include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, and tetraethylammonium hydroxide. , tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide and choline (2-hydroxyethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide).

作為顯影的方式,例如可舉出旋覆浸沒顯影、噴淋顯影、旋轉顯影及浸漬顯影等方式。Examples of the development methods include spin immersion development, shower development, spin development, and immersion development.

作為在本說明書中較佳地使用之顯影液,例如可舉出國際公開第2015/093271號的[0194]段中記載之顯影液,作為較佳地使用之顯影方式,例如可舉出國際公開第2015/093271號的[0195]段中記載之顯影方式。Examples of the developer preferably used in this specification include the developer described in paragraph [0194] of International Publication No. 2015/093271. Examples of the development method preferably used include International Publication No. 2015/093271. The development method described in paragraph [0195] of No. 2015/093271.

在顯影後轉移至下一步驟之前,實施沖洗處理亦較佳。沖洗處理中能夠使用水等。It is also preferable to perform a rinsing treatment after development and before moving to the next step. Water or the like can be used for the rinsing treatment.

藉由經過顯影步驟,能夠在帶發光元件之基板上形成樹脂圖案。樹脂圖案配置於相當於相鄰之發光元件彼此之間之部位,與發光元件對應之位置成為開口部。亦即,能夠在各發光元件的周圍形成用於與相鄰之發光元件分隔並抑制其漏光的隔壁層。 圖3示出實施顯影步驟之後的積層體40的剖面示意圖。積層體40由帶發光元件之基板10和樹脂圖案42構成。具體而言,樹脂圖案42配置於相當於相鄰之發光元件14彼此之間之部位,與發光元件14對應之位置成為開口部44。另外,在具有圖2所示的負型感光性層之積層體之情況下,樹脂圖案42相當於負型感光性層的硬化膜。 By going through the development step, a resin pattern can be formed on the substrate with light-emitting elements. The resin pattern is arranged at a position corresponding to the position between adjacent light-emitting elements, and the position corresponding to the light-emitting element becomes an opening. That is, a partition layer can be formed around each light-emitting element to separate the adjacent light-emitting element and suppress its light leakage. FIG3 shows a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the laminate 40 after the development step. The laminate 40 is composed of a substrate 10 with light-emitting elements and a resin pattern 42. Specifically, the resin pattern 42 is arranged at a position corresponding to the position between adjacent light-emitting elements 14, and the position corresponding to the light-emitting element 14 becomes an opening 44. In addition, in the case of a laminate having a negative photosensitive layer as shown in FIG2 , the resin pattern 42 corresponds to a cured film of the negative photosensitive layer.

<<步驟(1-B)(後曝光步驟)及步驟(1-C)(後烘烤步驟)>> 本發明的第1實施形態亦可以具有對藉由顯影步驟(步驟(1-3))得到之樹脂圖案進一步進行曝光之步驟(以下,亦稱為“步驟(1-B)”或“後曝光步驟”。)及/或進行加熱之步驟(以下,亦稱為“步驟(1-C)”或“後烘烤步驟”。)。 在本發明的第1實施形態具有後曝光步驟及後烘烤步驟這兩者之情況下,在實施後曝光步驟之後實施後烘烤步驟為較佳。 後曝光步驟中的曝光量為100~5000mJ/cm 2為較佳,200~3000mJ/cm 2為更佳。 後烘烤步驟中的後烘烤的溫度為80~250℃為較佳,90~160℃為更佳。 後烘烤步驟中的後烘烤的時間為1~180分鐘為較佳,10~60分鐘為更佳。 <<Step (1-B) (post-exposure step) and step (1-C) (post-baking step)>> The first embodiment of the present invention may also include a step of further exposing the resin pattern obtained by the development step (step (1-3)) (hereinafter, also referred to as "step (1-B)" or "post-exposure step") and/or a step of heating (hereinafter, also referred to as "step (1-C)" or "post-baking step"). In the case where the first embodiment of the present invention has both the post-exposure step and the post-baking step, it is preferred to perform the post-baking step after performing the post-exposure step. The exposure amount in the post-exposure step is preferably 100 to 5000 mJ/ cm2 , more preferably 200 to 3000 mJ/ cm2 . The post-baking temperature in the post-baking step is preferably 80 to 250°C, more preferably 90 to 160°C. The post-baking time in the post-baking step is preferably 1 to 180 minutes, more preferably 10 to 60 minutes.

<<轉印膜>> 以下,對本發明的第1實施形態中能夠使用之轉印膜進行說明。 作為轉印膜的結構,只要是具有臨時支撐體和感光性層(表示感光性之層)者,則不受特別限制。 感光性層可以為正型感光性層及負型感光性層中的任一種,負型感光性層為較佳。 感光性層可以為單層,亦可以為2層以上。 轉印膜可以具備除感光性層以外的其他組成物層(例如,水溶性樹脂層等)。 轉印膜可以具有保護膜。 <<Transfer film>> Hereinafter, a transfer film that can be used in the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. The structure of the transfer film is not particularly limited as long as it has a temporary support and a photosensitive layer (a layer showing photosensitivity). The photosensitive layer may be any of a positive photosensitive layer and a negative photosensitive layer, and a negative photosensitive layer is preferred. The photosensitive layer may be a single layer or may be two or more layers. The transfer film may have other component layers (for example, a water-soluble resin layer, etc.) in addition to the photosensitive layer. The transfer film may have a protective film.

圖4示出轉印膜的具體例。圖4所示之轉印膜20A依序具有臨時支撐體22、感光性層24及保護膜50。感光性層24為表示感光性之層,可以為正型感光性層及負型感光性層中的任一種,負型感光性層為較佳。在感光性層24為負型感光性層之情況下,藉由曝光使層中包含之成分發生硬化反應,成為樹脂層(硬化層)。 另外,圖4所示之轉印膜20A為配置有保護膜50之形態,但亦可以不配置保護膜50。 又,圖4所示之轉印膜20A亦可以具有除感光性層24以外的其他組成物層。 FIG4 shows a specific example of a transfer film. The transfer film 20A shown in FIG4 has a temporary support 22, a photosensitive layer 24, and a protective film 50 in order. The photosensitive layer 24 is a layer showing photosensitivity, and can be any one of a positive photosensitive layer and a negative photosensitive layer, and a negative photosensitive layer is preferred. When the photosensitive layer 24 is a negative photosensitive layer, the components contained in the layer undergo a curing reaction by exposure to form a resin layer (cured layer). In addition, the transfer film 20A shown in FIG4 is in a form with a protective film 50, but the protective film 50 may not be configured. In addition, the transfer film 20A shown in FIG4 may also have other component layers other than the photosensitive layer 24.

作為轉印膜的結構,在依據本發明的第1實施形態形成之積層體中,就發光元件的亮度更優異的觀點、更容易抑制外光反射之觀點、及/或能夠吸收在發光元件點亮時不必要地產生之雜散光之觀點而言,以下態樣亦較佳。 (N1)臨時支撐體/感光性的光吸收層前驅物層/保護膜 (N2)臨時支撐體/感光性的光反射層前驅物層/保護膜 (N3)臨時支撐體/感光性的光吸收層前驅物層/感光性的光反射層前驅物層/保護膜 As the structure of the transfer film, in the laminate formed according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the following aspects are also preferred from the viewpoint of better brightness of the light-emitting element, easier suppression of external light reflection, and/or the ability to absorb stray light that is unnecessarily generated when the light-emitting element is lit. (N1) Temporary support/photosensitive light absorbing layer pre-driver layer/protective film (N2) Temporary support/photosensitive light reflecting layer pre-driver layer/protective film (N3) Temporary support/photosensitive light absorbing layer pre-driver layer/photosensitive light reflecting layer pre-driver layer/protective film

另外,上述(N1)~(N3)所示之轉印膜為配置有保護膜之態樣,但亦可以不配置保護膜。 又,感光性的光吸收層前驅物層(以下簡稱為“光吸收層前驅物層”。)及感光性的光反射層前驅物層(以下簡稱為“光反射層前驅物層”。)為表示感光性之層,典型地為負型感光性層。 In addition, the transfer films shown in (N1) to (N3) above are provided with a protective film, but they may not be provided with a protective film. In addition, the photosensitive light-absorbing layer precursor layer (hereinafter referred to as the "light-absorbing layer precursor layer") and the photosensitive light-reflecting layer precursor layer (hereinafter referred to as the "light-reflecting layer precursor layer") are The layer representing photosensitivity is typically a negative photosensitive layer.

在圖4所示之轉印膜20A中,上述(N1)及(N2)的態樣的轉印膜分別相當於將感光性層24設為感光性的光吸收層前驅物層之情況、將感光性層24設為感光性的光反射層前驅物層。 另外,在本發明的第1實施形態中,在使用上述(N1)的態樣的轉印膜之情況下,在步驟(1-2)的圖案曝光中的曝光部位中,光吸收層前驅物層發生硬化反應,能夠形成圖案狀的光吸收層。亦即,能夠使樹脂圖案作為光吸收性的隔壁層發揮作用。具有該種樹脂圖案作為隔壁層之積層體容易吸收外光或雜散光。其結果,在發光元件的非點亮時,黑色緊固更優異。 又,在本發明的第1實施形態中,在使用上述(N2)的態樣的轉印膜之情況下,在步驟(1-2)的圖案曝光中的曝光部位中,光反射層前驅物層發生硬化反應,能夠形成圖案狀的光反射層。亦即,能夠使樹脂圖案作為光反射性的隔壁層發揮作用。具有該種樹脂圖案作為隔壁層之積層體在發光元件點亮時,來自發光元件的光容易被隔壁反射,從而亮度提高。 In the transfer film 20A shown in FIG. 4 , the transfer film in the above-mentioned aspects (N1) and (N2) corresponds to the case where the photosensitive layer 24 is a photosensitive light-absorbing layer precursor layer, respectively. The photosensitive layer 24 is a photosensitive light reflective layer precursor layer. In addition, in the first embodiment of the present invention, when the transfer film of the aspect (N1) is used, in the exposed portion in the pattern exposure of step (1-2), the light absorbing layer precursor The layer undergoes a hardening reaction to form a patterned light-absorbing layer. That is, the resin pattern can be made to function as a light-absorptive barrier layer. A laminate having such a resin pattern as a partition layer easily absorbs external light or stray light. As a result, black fastening is more excellent when the light-emitting element is not lit. Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the present invention, when the transfer film of the above aspect (N2) is used, in the exposed portion in the pattern exposure of step (1-2), the light reflective layer precursor The layer undergoes a hardening reaction to form a patterned light reflective layer. That is, the resin pattern can be made to function as a light-reflective barrier layer. In a laminate having such a resin pattern as a partition wall layer, when the light-emitting element is lit, the light from the light-emitting element is easily reflected by the partition wall, thereby improving the brightness.

在圖4所示之轉印膜20A中,上述(N3)的態樣的轉印膜相當於將感光性層24設為2層結構,將一側作為感光性的光吸收層前驅物層,將另一側作為感光性的光反射層前驅物層之情況。 圖5示出上述(N3)的態樣的轉印膜的剖面示意圖。圖5所示之轉印膜20A依序具有臨時支撐體22、感光性層24及保護膜50。感光性層24從臨時支撐體22側朝向保護膜50具有光吸收層前驅物層26和光反射層前驅物層28。 In the transfer film 20A shown in FIG. 4 , the transfer film in the above aspect (N3) is equivalent to having the photosensitive layer 24 as a two-layer structure, with one side serving as the photosensitive light-absorbing layer precursor layer. The other side is used as a photosensitive light reflective layer precursor layer. FIG. 5 shows a schematic cross-sectional view of the transfer film in the aspect (N3) described above. The transfer film 20A shown in FIG. 5 has a temporary support 22, a photosensitive layer 24, and a protective film 50 in this order. The photosensitive layer 24 has a light-absorbing layer precursor layer 26 and a light-reflecting layer precursor layer 28 from the temporary support 22 side toward the protective film 50 .

另外,在本發明的第1實施形態中,在使用上述(N3)的態樣的轉印膜之情況下,在步驟(1-2)的圖案曝光中的曝光部位中,光吸收層前驅物層及光反射層前驅物層發生硬化反應,藉由顯影步驟(步驟(1-3)),能夠形成從帶發光元件之基板側依序具有光反射層和光吸收層之樹脂圖案。在具有該種樹脂圖案作為隔壁層之積層體中,外光或雜散光容易被光吸收層吸收,其結果,在發光元件的非點亮時,黑色緊固更優異。又,由於光反射層,在發光元件點亮時,來自發光元件的光容易被隔壁反射,從而亮度提高。In addition, in the first embodiment of the present invention, when the transfer film of the above-mentioned (N3) aspect is used, in the exposure portion in the pattern exposure of step (1-2), the light absorbing layer precursor layer and the light reflecting layer precursor layer undergo a hardening reaction, and by the development step (step (1-3)), a resin pattern having a light reflecting layer and a light absorbing layer in order from the substrate side with the light emitting element can be formed. In the laminate having such a resin pattern as a partition layer, external light or stray light is easily absorbed by the light absorbing layer, and as a result, when the light emitting element is not lit, black fastening is more excellent. In addition, due to the light reflecting layer, when the light emitting element is lit, the light from the light emitting element is easily reflected by the partition, thereby improving the brightness.

如後所述,光吸收層前驅物層相當於包含光吸收性物質之負型感光性層,光反射層前驅物層相當於包含反射性調整劑之負型感光性層。As described below, the light absorbing layer front-driver layer is equivalent to a negative photosensitive layer containing a light absorbing substance, and the light reflecting layer front-driver layer is equivalent to a negative photosensitive layer containing a reflectivity adjuster.

作為轉印膜的結構,在依據本發明的第1實施形態形成之積層體中,就發光元件的亮度更優異的觀點、更容易抑制外光反射之觀點、及/或能夠吸收在發光元件點亮時不必要地產生之雜散光之觀點而言,以下態樣亦較佳。 (P1)臨時支撐體/感光性的光吸收層/保護膜 (P2)臨時支撐體/感光性的光反射層/保護膜 (P3)臨時支撐體/感光性的光吸收層/感光性的光反射層/保護膜 另外,上述(P1)~(P3)所示之轉印膜為配置有保護膜之態樣,但亦可以不配置保護膜。 又,感光性的光吸收層及感光性的光反射層為表示感光性之層,典型地為正型感光性層。 As the structure of the transfer film, in the laminate formed according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the following aspects are also preferred from the viewpoint of better brightness of the light-emitting element, easier suppression of external light reflection, and/or the ability to absorb stray light that is unnecessarily generated when the light-emitting element is lit. (P1) Temporary support/photosensitive light absorbing layer/protective film (P2) Temporary support/photosensitive light reflecting layer/protective film (P3) Temporary support/photosensitive light absorbing layer/photosensitive light reflecting layer/protective film In addition, the transfer films shown in (P1) to (P3) above are in the form of a protective film, but may not be provided with a protective film. In addition, the photosensitive light absorbing layer and the photosensitive light reflecting layer are layers showing photosensitivity, and are typically positive photosensitive layers.

另外,光吸收層相當於包含光吸收性物質之正型感光性層,光反射層相當於包含反射性調整劑之正型感光性層。In addition, the light-absorbing layer corresponds to a positive-type photosensitive layer containing a light-absorbing substance, and the light-reflecting layer corresponds to a positive-type photosensitive layer containing a reflectivity adjuster.

以下,對構成轉印膜之各要素進行說明。Hereinafter, each element constituting the transfer film will be described.

<臨時支撐體> 轉印膜具有臨時支撐體。 臨時支撐體為支撐感光性層之構件,最終藉由剝離處理而被去除。 <Temporary support> The transfer film has a temporary support. The temporary support is a member that supports the photosensitive layer and is eventually removed by a peeling process.

臨時支撐體可以為單層結構,亦可以為多層結構。 臨時支撐體為薄膜為較佳,樹脂膜為更佳。作為臨時支撐體,具有可撓性且在加壓下或在加壓及加熱下不會發生明顯的變形、收縮或伸長之薄膜為較佳。 作為上述薄膜,例如可舉出聚對酞酸乙二酯膜(例如,雙軸拉伸聚對酞酸乙二酯膜)、聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯膜、三乙酸纖維素膜、聚苯乙烯膜、聚醯亞胺膜及聚碳酸酯膜。 其中,作為臨時支撐體,聚對酞酸乙二酯膜為較佳。 又,在用作臨時支撐體之薄膜中沒有褶皺等變形及劃痕等為較佳。 The temporary support may be a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure. The temporary support is preferably a film, and a resin film is more preferred. As a temporary support, a film that is flexible and does not undergo significant deformation, contraction or elongation under pressure or under pressure and heat is preferred. As the above-mentioned film, for example, polyethylene terephthalate film (for example, biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film), polymethyl methacrylate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film, polyimide film and polycarbonate film can be cited. Among them, polyethylene terephthalate film is preferred as a temporary support. Furthermore, it is preferred that the film used as a temporary support has no deformation such as wrinkles or scratches.

就能夠隔著臨時支撐體進行圖案曝光之觀點而言,臨時支撐體的透明性高為較佳,365nm、405nm及436nm下的透射率為60%以上為較佳,70%以上為更佳,80%以上為進一步較佳,90%以上為特佳。作為透射率的較佳值,例如可舉出87%、92%及98%等。 就經由臨時支撐體進行圖案曝光時的圖案形成性及臨時支撐體的透明性的觀點而言,臨時支撐體的霧度小為較佳。具體而言,臨時支撐體的霧度值為2%以下為較佳,0.5%以下為更佳,0.1%以下為進一步較佳。 就經由臨時支撐體圖案曝光時的圖案形成性及臨時支撐體的透明性的觀點而言,臨時支撐體中包含之微粒、異物及缺陷的數量少為較佳。臨時支撐體中的直徑1μm以上的微粒、異物及缺陷的數量為50個/10mm 2以下為較佳,10個/10mm 2以下為更佳,3個/10mm 2以下為進一步較佳,0個/10mm 2為特佳。 From the viewpoint of being able to perform pattern exposure through a temporary support, the higher the transparency of the temporary support, the better. The transmittance at 365nm, 405nm and 436nm is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 70%, further preferably 80% or more, and particularly preferably 90% or more. Examples of preferred values of transmittance include 87%, 92% and 98%. From the viewpoint of pattern formability when performing pattern exposure through a temporary support and the transparency of the temporary support, it is preferred that the haze of the temporary support is small. Specifically, the haze value of the temporary support is preferably 2% or less, more preferably 0.5% or less, and further preferably 0.1% or less. From the viewpoint of pattern formation during pattern exposure through the temporary support and the transparency of the temporary support, the smaller the number of particles, foreign matter and defects contained in the temporary support, the better. The number of particles, foreign matter and defects with a diameter of 1 μm or more in the temporary support is preferably 50 pieces/ 10 mm2 or less, more preferably 10 pieces/ 10 mm2 or less, further preferably 3 pieces/10 mm2 or less, and particularly preferably 0 pieces/10 mm2 or less.

臨時支撐體的厚度不受特別限制,但5~200μm為較佳,就易操作性及通用性的觀點而言,5~150μm為更佳,5~50μm為進一步較佳,5~25μm為特佳。臨時支撐體的厚度能夠藉由基於SEM(掃描式電子顯微鏡:Scanning Electron Microscope)的剖面觀察而測量之任意5個點的平均值來計算。The thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but 5 to 200 μm is preferred, 5 to 150 μm is more preferred, 5 to 50 μm is further preferred, and 5 to 25 μm is particularly preferred from the viewpoint of ease of operation and versatility. The thickness of the temporary support can be calculated by the average value of any five points measured by cross-section observation using a SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope).

又,以提高臨時支撐體與形成於臨時支撐體上之感光性層的密接性為目的,臨時支撐體的與感光性層接觸之一側的面亦可以藉由UV(ultraviolet)照射、電暈放電及電漿等進行表面改質。In order to improve the adhesion between the temporary support and the photosensitive layer formed on the temporary support, the surface of the temporary support in contact with the photosensitive layer may be surface-modified by UV (ultraviolet) irradiation, coma discharge, plasma, etc.

在藉由UV照射來實施臨時支撐體的表面改質之情況下,曝光量為10~2000mJ/cm 2為較佳,50~1000mJ/cm 2為更佳。另外,作為光源,可舉出發射150~450nm波長區域的光之低壓水銀燈、高壓水銀燈、超過壓水銀燈、碳弧燈、金屬鹵化物燈、氙氣燈、化學燈、無極放電燈及發光二極體(LED)等。只要光照射量能夠在該範圍內,則燈輸出或照度沒有特別限制。 When the surface modification of the temporary support is carried out by UV irradiation, the exposure amount is preferably 10 to 2000 mJ/cm 2 and more preferably 50 to 1000 mJ/cm 2 . Examples of the light source include low-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, super-pressure mercury lamps, carbon arc lamps, metal halide lamps, xenon lamps, chemical lamps, electrodeless discharge lamps, and light-emitting diodes that emit light in the wavelength range of 150 to 450 nm. (LED) etc. As long as the amount of light irradiation can be within this range, the lamp output or illuminance is not particularly limited.

作為臨時支撐體,例如可舉出厚度16μm的雙軸拉伸聚對酞酸乙二酯膜、厚度12μm的雙軸拉伸聚對酞酸乙二酯膜及厚度9μm的雙軸拉伸聚對酞酸乙二酯膜。As the temporary support, for example, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 16 μm, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 12 μm, and a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 9 μm can be cited.

臨時支撐體亦可以為回收再利用品。作為回收再利用品,可舉出對使用過的薄膜等進行洗滌、晶片化,將其作為材料進行薄膜化而成者等。作為回收再利用品的具體例,可舉出TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC.的Ecouse系列。 作為臨時支撐體的較佳形態,例如可舉出日本特開2014-085643號公報的[0017]~[0018]段、日本特開2016-027363號公報的[0019]~[0026]段、國際公開第2012/081680號的[0041]~[0057]段及國際公開第2018/179370號的[0029]~[0040]段的記載,該等公報的內容被編入本說明書中。 The temporary support can also be recycled. Examples of recycled products include those obtained by washing and wafering used films and the like, and then using the materials as materials to form thin films. Specific examples of recycled products include the Ecouse series of TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC. Preferable forms of the temporary support include, for example, paragraphs [0017] to [0018] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-085643, paragraphs [0019] to [0026] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-027363, and International The contents of paragraphs [0041] to [0057] of Publication No. 2012/081680 and paragraphs [0029] to [0040] of International Publication No. 2018/179370 are incorporated into this specification.

就賦予操作性之觀點而言,在臨時支撐體的表面可以設置包含微小的粒子之層(潤滑劑層)。潤滑劑層可以設置於臨時支撐體的一面,亦可以設置於兩面。潤滑劑層中包含之粒子的直徑為0.05~0.8μm為較佳。 又,潤滑劑層的厚度為0.05~1.0μm為較佳。作為臨時支撐體的市售品,可舉出Lumirror 16KS40,Lumirror 16FB40、Lumirror #38-U48、Lumirror #75-U34及Lumirror #25T60(以上為TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC.製造);COSMOSHINE A4100、COSMOSHINE A4300、COSMOSHINE A4160、COSMOSHINE A4360及COSMOSHINE A8300(以上為TOYOBO Co., Ltd.製造)。 From the perspective of providing operability, a layer (lubricant layer) containing tiny particles can be provided on the surface of the temporary support. The lubricant layer can be provided on one side of the temporary support or on both sides. The diameter of the particles contained in the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 to 0.8 μm. In addition, the thickness of the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 to 1.0 μm. Commercially available products for temporary supports include Lumirror 16KS40, Lumirror 16FB40, Lumirror #38-U48, Lumirror #75-U34, and Lumirror #25T60 (all manufactured by TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC.); COSMOSHINE A4100, COSMOSHINE A4300, COSMOSHINE A4160, COSMOSHINE A4360, and COSMOSHINE A8300 (all manufactured by TOYOBO Co., Ltd.).

<感光性層> (感光性層的成分) 感光性層可以為正型感光性層及負型感光性層中的任一種,負型感光性層為較佳。 在感光性層為負型感光性層之情況下,感光性層例如為至少包含鹼溶性樹脂、聚合性化合物及光聚合起始劑之結構為較佳。又,如上所述,感光性層亦可以為光反射層前驅物層及光吸收層前驅物層。在感光性層為光反射層前驅物層之情況下,感光性層包含後述之反射性調整劑,在感光性層為光吸收層前驅物層之情況下,感光性層包含後述之光吸收性物質。 <Photosensitive layer> (Components of the photosensitive layer) The photosensitive layer may be any of a positive photosensitive layer and a negative photosensitive layer, and a negative photosensitive layer is preferred. In the case where the photosensitive layer is a negative photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer preferably has a structure including at least an alkali-soluble resin, a polymerizable compound, and a photopolymerization initiator. In addition, as described above, the photosensitive layer may also be a light-reflecting layer precursor layer and a light-absorbing layer precursor layer. When the photosensitive layer is a light-reflecting layer precursor, the photosensitive layer includes a reflective adjuster described below. When the photosensitive layer is a light-absorbing layer precursor, the photosensitive layer includes a light-absorbing substance described below.

在感光性層為正型感光性層之情況下,感光性層例如為至少包含聚合物及光酸產生劑之結構為較佳。又,如上所述,感光性層亦可以為感光性的光反射層及感光性的光吸收層。在感光性層為感光性的光反射層之情況下,感光性層包含後述之反射性調整劑,在感光性層為感光性的光吸收層之情況下,感光性層包含後述之光吸收性物質。When the photosensitive layer is a positive photosensitive layer, it is preferable that the photosensitive layer has a structure including at least a polymer and a photoacid generator. Moreover, as mentioned above, the photosensitive layer may be a photosensitive light reflection layer and a photosensitive light absorption layer. When the photosensitive layer is a photosensitive light reflective layer, the photosensitive layer contains a reflectivity modifier described below. When the photosensitive layer is a photosensitive light absorbing layer, the photosensitive layer contains a light absorbing agent described below. material.

(感光性層的雜質) 感光性層亦可以包含選自包括金屬及金屬離子之群組中之雜質(以下亦稱為“雜質A”。)。作為雜質A的具體例,可舉出鈉、鉀、鎂、鈣、鐵、錳、銅、鋁、鈦、鉻、鈷、鎳、鋅、錫、鹵素及它們的離子。其中,鹵化物離子、鈉離子及鉀離子容易以雜質形式混入,因此設為下述含量為較佳。 作為雜質A的含量的上限值,相對於感光性層的總質量,150質量ppm以下為較佳,100質量ppm以下為更佳,10質量ppm以下為進一步較佳,2質量ppm以下為特佳。作為雜質A的含量的下限值,相對於感光性層的總質量,能夠設為1質量ppb以上或0.1質量ppm以上。 其中,作為氯化物離子的含量的上限值,相對於感光性層的總質量,100質量ppm以下為較佳,50質量ppm以下為更佳,10質量ppm以下為進一步較佳,2質量ppm以下為特佳。作為氯化物離子的含量的下限值,相對於感光性層的總質量,能夠設為1質量ppb以上或0.1質量ppm以上。 作為將雜質A設在上述範圍內之方法,可舉出:作為感光性層的原料而選擇雜質的含量少者;形成感光性層時防止雜質的混入;及洗滌雜質而將其去除。藉由該種方法,能夠將雜質量設在上述範圍內。 (Impurities in the photosensitive layer) The photosensitive layer may also contain impurities selected from the group including metals and metal ions (hereinafter also referred to as "impurity A"). Specific examples of the impurity A include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, manganese, copper, aluminum, titanium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, zinc, tin, halogens and ions thereof. Among them, halide ions, sodium ions and potassium ions are easily mixed in as impurities, so the following contents are preferred. The upper limit of the content of the impurity A is preferably 150 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 100 ppm by mass or less, further preferably 10 ppm by mass or less, and specifically 2 ppm by mass or less relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. good. The lower limit of the content of the impurity A can be 1 mass ppb or more or 0.1 mass ppm or more relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Among them, the upper limit of the content of chloride ions is preferably 100 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 50 ppm by mass or less, further preferably 10 ppm by mass or less, and 2 ppm by mass, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. The following are the best. The lower limit of the chloride ion content can be 1 mass ppb or more or 0.1 mass ppm or more relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Methods for setting the impurity A within the above range include selecting a raw material for the photosensitive layer with a small content of impurities, preventing contamination of impurities when forming the photosensitive layer, and washing and removing impurities. By this method, the amount of impurities can be set within the above range.

雜質A例如能夠利用ICP(Inductively Coupled Plasma:感應耦合電漿)發光分光分析法、原子吸光分光法及離子層析法等公知的方法進行定量。Impurity A can be quantified by known methods such as ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectrometry, atomic absorption spectrometry, and ion chromatography.

又,感光性層中,有機溶劑的含量愈少為較佳。 作為有機溶劑的含量,相對於感光性層的總質量為100質量ppm以下為較佳,20質量ppm以下為更佳,4質量ppm以下為進一步較佳。作為有機溶劑的含量的下限值,相對於感光性層的總質量,亦可以為10質量ppb以上。 有機溶劑的含量能夠利用ICP(Inductively Coupled Plasma:感應耦合電漿)發光分光分析法、原子吸光分光法及離子層析法等公知的方法進行定量。 作為上述有機溶劑,具體而言,可舉出選自包括苯、甲醛、三氯乙烯、1,3-丁二烯、四氯化碳、氯仿、N,N-二甲基甲醯胺、N,N-二甲基乙醯胺及己烷之群組中者。 In addition, the less the content of the organic solvent in the photosensitive layer, the better. As the content of the organic solvent, it is preferably 100 mass ppm or less relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, 20 mass ppm or less is more preferably, and 4 mass ppm or less is further preferably. As the lower limit of the content of the organic solvent, it can also be 10 mass ppb or more relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. The content of the organic solvent can be quantified by known methods such as ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectrometry, atomic absorption spectrometry, and ion chromatography. Specifically, the above-mentioned organic solvent may be selected from the group consisting of benzene, formaldehyde, trichloroethylene, 1,3-butadiene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide and hexane.

作為感光性層中的水的含量,就提高可靠性及層壓性之觀點而言,相對於感光性層的總質量,5.0質量%以下為較佳,3.0質量%以下為更佳,1.0質量%以下為進一步較佳。另外,作為感光性層中的水的含量的下限值,愈少為較佳,但相對於層的總質量,例如亦可以為0.01質量%以上。The water content in the photosensitive layer is preferably 5.0% by mass or less, more preferably 3.0% by mass or less, and 1.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and lamination properties. % or less is further preferred. In addition, the lower limit of the water content in the photosensitive layer is preferably smaller, but it may be, for example, 0.01 mass % or more based on the total mass of the layer.

以下,對負型感光性層及正型感光性層分別進行說明。Hereinafter, the negative photosensitive layer and the positive photosensitive layer will be described respectively.

《負型感光性層》 以下,對負型感光性層中可包含之成分進行詳細敘述。 -鹼溶性樹脂- 感光性層包含鹼溶性樹脂為較佳。 作為鹼溶性樹脂,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂、苯乙烯樹脂、環氧樹脂、醯胺樹脂、醯胺環氧樹脂、醇酸樹脂、酚醛樹脂、酯樹脂、胺酯樹脂、藉由環氧樹脂與(甲基)丙烯酸的反應而得到之環氧丙烯酸酯樹脂及藉由環氧丙烯酸酯樹脂與酸酐的反應而得到之酸改質環氧丙烯酸酯樹脂。 "Negative photosensitive layer" The components contained in the negative photosensitive layer will be described in detail below. -Alkali-soluble resin- The photosensitive layer preferably contains an alkali-soluble resin. Examples of the alkali-soluble resin include (meth)acrylic resin, styrene resin, epoxy resin, amide resin, amide epoxy resin, alkyd resin, phenolic resin, ester resin, urethane resin, etc. Epoxy acrylate resin obtained by the reaction of epoxy resin and (meth)acrylic acid and acid-modified epoxy acrylate resin obtained by the reaction of epoxy acrylate resin and acid anhydride.

(鹼溶性樹脂的較佳態樣1) 作為鹼溶性樹脂的較佳態樣之一,就鹼顯影性及薄膜形成性優異的觀點而言,可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂。 另外,在本說明書中,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂係指具有來自於(甲基)丙烯酸化合物之構成單元之樹脂。 相對於(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的所有構成單元,來自於(甲基)丙烯酸化合物之構成單元的含量為50質量%以上為較佳,70質量%以上為更佳,90質量%以上為進一步較佳。(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂可以僅由來自於(甲基)丙烯酸化合物之構成單元構成,亦可以具有來自於除(甲基)丙烯酸化合物以外的聚合性單體之構成單元。亦即,相對於(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的所有構成單元,來自於(甲基)丙烯酸化合物之構成單元的含量的上限為100質量%以下。 又,相對於(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的所有構成單元,來自於(甲基)丙烯酸化合物之構成單元的含量為50莫耳%以上為較佳,70莫耳%以上為更佳,90莫耳%以上為進一步較佳。(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂可以僅由來自於(甲基)丙烯酸化合物之構成單元構成,亦可以具有來自於除(甲基)丙烯酸化合物以外的聚合性單體之構成單元。亦即,相對於(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的所有構成單元,來自於(甲基)丙烯酸化合物之構成單元的含量的上限為100莫耳%以下。 另外,在本說明書中,在以莫耳比規定“構成單元”的含量之情況下,上述“構成單元”與“單體單元”的含義相同。又,在本說明書中,上述“單體單元”可以藉由高分子反應等而聚合之後被修飾。以下亦相同。 (Preferred embodiment 1 of alkali-soluble resin) As one of the preferred embodiments of alkali-soluble resin, (meth)acrylic resin can be cited from the viewpoint of excellent alkali developability and film forming property. In addition, in this specification, (meth)acrylic resin refers to a resin having a constituent unit derived from a (meth)acrylic compound. The content of the constituent unit derived from the (meth)acrylic compound is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, and even more preferably 90% by mass or more relative to all the constituent units of the (meth)acrylic resin. The (meth)acrylic resin may be composed only of constituent units derived from a (meth)acrylic compound, or may have constituent units derived from a polymerizable monomer other than a (meth)acrylic compound. That is, the upper limit of the content of the constituent units derived from the (meth)acrylic compound relative to all the constituent units of the (meth)acrylic resin is 100 mass % or less. Moreover, the content of the constituent units derived from the (meth)acrylic compound relative to all the constituent units of the (meth)acrylic resin is preferably 50 mol % or more, 70 mol % or more is more preferably, and 90 mol % or more is further preferably. The (meth)acrylic resin may be composed only of constituent units derived from the (meth)acrylic compound, or may have constituent units derived from polymerizable monomers other than the (meth)acrylic compound. That is, the upper limit of the content of the constituent units derived from the (meth)acrylic compound relative to all the constituent units of the (meth)acrylic resin is 100 mol % or less. In addition, in this specification, when the content of "constituent unit" is specified by molar ratio, the above-mentioned "constituent unit" and "monomer unit" have the same meaning. In addition, in this specification, the above-mentioned "monomer unit" can be modified after polymerization by polymer reaction, etc. The same applies to the following.

作為(甲基)丙烯酸化合物,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸、(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯醯胺及(甲基)丙烯腈。 作為(甲基)丙烯酸酯,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸四氫糠基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二甲基胺基乙基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二乙基胺基乙基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苄基酯、2,2,2-三氟乙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯及2,2,3,3-四氟丙基(甲基)丙烯酸酯,(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯為較佳。 作為(甲基)丙烯酸醯胺,例如可舉出二丙酮丙烯醯胺等丙烯醯胺。 Examples of the (meth)acrylic compound include (meth)acrylic acid, (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylamide, and (meth)acrylonitrile. Examples of (meth)acrylates include alkyl (meth)acrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth)acrylate, dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylate. Diethylaminoethyl acrylate, glycidyl (meth)acrylate, benzyl (meth)acrylate, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl (meth)acrylate and 2,2,3 , 3-Tetrafluoropropyl (meth)acrylate and alkyl (meth)acrylate are preferred. Examples of (meth)acrylamide include acrylamide such as diacetone acrylamide.

作為(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的烷基,可以為直鏈狀,亦可以具有分支。作為具體例,例如可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯及(甲基)丙烯酸十二烷基酯等具有碳數為1~12的烷基之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯。 又,作為(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯的烷基,亦可以為環狀。作為環狀烷基,可以為單環,亦可以為多環。作為具體例,可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯等。 作為(甲基)丙烯酸酯,具有碳數1~4的烷基之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯為較佳,(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯或(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯為更佳。 The alkyl group of the alkyl (meth)acrylate may be a straight chain or may have a branch. Specific examples include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, propyl (meth)acrylate, butyl (meth)acrylate, pentyl (meth)acrylate, hexyl (meth)acrylate, heptyl (meth)acrylate, octyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, nonyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, and dodecyl (meth)acrylate, which have an alkyl group with a carbon number of 1 to 12. In addition, the alkyl group of the alkyl (meth)acrylate may be a cyclic group. The cyclic alkyl group may be a monocyclic group or a polycyclic group. Specific examples include cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, etc. As the (meth)acrylate, an alkyl (meth)acrylate having an alkyl group with 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferred, and methyl (meth)acrylate or ethyl (meth)acrylate is more preferred.

(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂可以具有除來自於(甲基)丙烯酸化合物之構成單元以外的構成單元。 作為形成上述構成單元之聚合性單體,只要為能夠與(甲基)丙烯酸化合物共聚之(甲基)丙烯酸化合物以外的化合物,則不受特別限制,例如可舉出苯乙烯、乙烯基甲苯及α-甲基苯乙烯等在α位或芳香族環上可以具有取代基之苯乙烯化合物、丙烯腈及乙烯基-正丁醚等乙烯醇酯、順丁烯二酸、順丁烯二酸酐、順丁烯二酸單甲酯、順丁烯二酸單乙酯及順丁烯二酸單異丙酯等順丁烯二酸單酯、反丁烯二酸、桂皮酸、α-氰基桂皮酸、衣康酸以及巴豆酸。 該等聚合性單體可以單獨使用1種或者組合使用2種以上。 The (meth)acrylic resin may have constituent units other than constituent units derived from (meth)acrylic acid compounds. As polymerizable monomers forming the above constituent units, there are no particular restrictions as long as they are compounds other than (meth)acrylic acid compounds that can copolymerize with (meth)acrylic acid compounds. Examples thereof include styrene compounds that may have substituents at the α position or on the aromatic ring, such as styrene, vinyl toluene, and α-methyl styrene, vinyl alcohol esters such as acrylonitrile and vinyl-n-butyl ether, maleic acid, maleic anhydride, maleic acid monomethyl ester, maleic acid monoethyl ester, and maleic acid monoisopropyl ester, maleic acid, fumaric acid, cinnamic acid, α-cyanocinnamic acid, itaconic acid, and crotonic acid. These polymerizable monomers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

又,就使鹼顯影性變得更良好之觀點而言,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂含有具有酸基之構成單元為較佳。作為酸基,例如可舉出羧基、磺酸基、磷酸基及膦酸基。 其中,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂含有具有羧基之構成單元為更佳,具有來自於上述(甲基)丙烯酸之構成單元為進一步較佳。 Moreover, from the viewpoint of making the alkali developability more favorable, it is preferable that the (meth)acrylic resin contains a structural unit having an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphate group and a phosphonic acid group. Among them, it is more preferable that the (meth)acrylic resin contains a structural unit having a carboxyl group, and it is still more preferable that it has a structural unit derived from the above-mentioned (meth)acrylic acid.

就顯影性更優異的觀點而言,相對於(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的所有構成單元,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂中的具有酸基之構成單元(較佳為來自於(甲基)丙烯酸之構成單元)的含量為10質量%以上為較佳。又,上限值不受特別限制,但就耐鹼性優異的觀點而言,50質量%以下為較佳,40質量%以下為更佳。 就顯影性更優異的觀點而言,相對於(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的所有構成單元,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂中的具有酸基之構成單元(較佳為來自於(甲基)丙烯酸之構成單元)的含量為10莫耳%以上為較佳。又,上限值不受特別限制,但就耐鹼性優異的觀點而言,50莫耳%以下為較佳,40莫耳%以下為更佳。 From the viewpoint of better developing property, the content of the constituent units having an acid group in the (meth)acrylic resin (preferably the constituent units derived from (meth)acrylic acid) is preferably 10% by mass or more relative to all the constituent units of the (meth)acrylic resin. In addition, the upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of excellent alkali resistance, 50% by mass or less is preferred, and 40% by mass or less is more preferred. From the viewpoint of better developing property, the content of the constituent units having an acid group in the (meth)acrylic resin (preferably the constituent units derived from (meth)acrylic acid) is preferably 10% by mole or more relative to all the constituent units of the (meth)acrylic resin. In addition, the upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the perspective of excellent alkali resistance, 50 mol% or less is preferred, and 40 mol% or less is more preferred.

又,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂具有來自於上述(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元為更佳。 相對於(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的所有構成單元,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂中的來自於(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元的含量為50~90質量%為較佳,60~90質量%為更佳,65~90質量%為進一步較佳。 又,相對於(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的所有構成單元,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂中的來自於(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元的含量為50~90莫耳%為較佳,60~90莫耳%為更佳,65~90莫耳%為進一步較佳。 Furthermore, it is more preferable that the (meth)acrylic resin has a constituent unit derived from the above-mentioned alkyl (meth)acrylate. The content of the constituent unit derived from the alkyl (meth)acrylate in the (meth)acrylic resin is preferably 50 to 90 mass %, more preferably 60 to 90 mass %, and further preferably 65 to 90 mass % relative to all the constituent units of the (meth)acrylic resin. Furthermore, it is more preferable that the content of the constituent unit derived from the alkyl (meth)acrylate in the (meth)acrylic resin is 50 to 90 mol %, more preferably 60 to 90 mol %, and further preferably 65 to 90 mol % relative to all the constituent units of the (meth)acrylic resin.

作為(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂,具有來自於(甲基)丙烯酸之構成單元及來自於(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元這兩者之樹脂為較佳,僅由來自於(甲基)丙烯酸之構成單元及來自於(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元構成之樹脂為更佳。 又,作為(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂,具有來自於甲基丙烯酸之構成單元、來自於甲基丙烯酸甲酯之構成單元及來自於丙烯酸乙酯之構成單元之丙烯酸樹脂亦較佳。 As the (meth)acrylic resin, a resin having both a structural unit derived from (meth)acrylic acid and a structural unit derived from (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferred, and only a resin derived from (meth)acrylic acid A resin composed of structural units derived from acrylic acid and alkyl (meth)acrylate is more preferred. Furthermore, as the (meth)acrylic resin, an acrylic resin having a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid, a structural unit derived from methyl methacrylate, and a structural unit derived from ethyl acrylate is also preferred.

又,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂具有選自包括來自於甲基丙烯酸之構成單元及來自於甲基丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元之群組中之至少1種為較佳,具有來自於甲基丙烯酸之構成單元及來自於甲基丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元這兩者為較佳。 相對於(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的所有構成單元,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂中的來自於甲基丙烯酸之構成單元及來自於甲基丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元的合計含量為40質量%以上為較佳,60質量%以上為更佳。上限不受特別限制,可以為100質量%以下,80質量%以下為較佳。 相對於(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的所有構成單元,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂中的來自於甲基丙烯酸之構成單元及來自於甲基丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元的合計含量為40莫耳%以上為較佳,60莫耳%以上為更佳。上限不受特別限制,可以為100莫耳%以下,80莫耳%以下為較佳。 Furthermore, the (meth)acrylic resin preferably has at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from alkyl methacrylate. Both structural units derived from alkyl methacrylate and structural units derived from alkyl methacrylate are preferred. The total content of the structural units derived from methacrylic acid and the structural units derived from alkyl methacrylate in the (meth)acrylic resin is 40% by mass or more relative to all the structural units of the (meth)acrylic resin. Preferably, it is more than 60 mass %. The upper limit is not particularly limited and may be 100 mass% or less, preferably 80 mass% or less. The total content of the structural units derived from methacrylic acid and the structural units derived from alkyl methacrylate in the (meth)acrylic resin is 40 mol% or more relative to all the structural units of the (meth)acrylic resin. Preferably, it is more than 60 mol%. The upper limit is not particularly limited and may be 100 mol% or less, preferably 80 mol% or less.

又,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂具有選自包括來自於甲基丙烯酸之構成單元及來自於甲基丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元之群組中之至少1種和選自包括來自於丙烯酸之構成單元及來自於丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元之群組中之至少1種亦較佳。 相對於來自於丙烯酸之構成單元及來自於丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元的合計含量,來自於甲基丙烯酸之構成單元及來自於甲基丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元的合計含量以質量比計為60/40~80/20為較佳。 Furthermore, the (meth)acrylic resin has at least one selected from the group consisting of structural units derived from methacrylic acid and structural units derived from alkyl methacrylate, and a structural unit selected from the group consisting of structural units derived from acrylic acid. And at least one kind from the group of structural units derived from alkyl acrylate is also preferred. Relative to the total content of the structural units derived from acrylic acid and the structural units derived from alkyl acrylate, the total content of the structural units derived from methacrylic acid and the structural units derived from alkyl methacrylate is calculated as a mass ratio. 60/40~80/20 is better.

就轉印後的感光性層的顯影性優異的觀點而言,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂在末端具有酯基為較佳。 另外,(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂的末端部由來自於合成中所使用之聚合起始劑之部位構成。在末端具有酯基之(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂能夠藉由使用產生具有酯基之自由基之聚合起始劑來合成。 From the viewpoint of excellent developability of the photosensitive layer after transfer, the (meth)acrylic resin preferably has an ester group at the terminal. In addition, the terminal portion of the (meth)acrylic resin is composed of a portion derived from the polymerization initiator used for synthesis. A (meth)acrylic resin having an ester group at the terminal can be synthesized by using a polymerization initiator that generates a radical having an ester group.

(鹼溶性樹脂的較佳態樣2) 又,作為鹼溶性樹脂的其他較佳態樣,就顯影性更優異的觀點而言,可舉出酸值60mgKOH/g以上的鹼溶性樹脂。該種鹼溶性樹脂中,就容易藉由加熱而與交聯成分熱交聯,從而形成牢固的膜之觀點而言,酸值60mgKOH/g以上的具有羧基之樹脂(以下亦稱為“含有羧基之樹脂”)為更佳,酸值60mgKOH/g以上的具有羧基之(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂(以下亦稱為“含有羧基之(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂”)為進一步較佳。若鹼溶性樹脂為具有羧基之樹脂,則例如藉由添加封端異氰酸酯化合物等熱交聯性化合物來進行熱交聯,能夠提高三維交聯密度。又,此時,若具有羧基之樹脂的羧基被脫水,進行疏水化,則能夠改善耐濕熱性。 (Preferred embodiment 2 of the alkali-soluble resin) In addition, as another preferred embodiment of the alkali-soluble resin, from the viewpoint of better developing property, an alkali-soluble resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH/g or more can be cited. Among such alkali-soluble resins, from the viewpoint of easily thermally crosslinking with a crosslinking component by heating to form a strong film, a resin having a carboxyl group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH/g or more (hereinafter also referred to as a "resin containing a carboxyl group") is more preferred, and a (meth) acrylic resin having a carboxyl group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH/g or more (hereinafter also referred to as a "(meth) acrylic resin containing a carboxyl group") is further preferred. If the alkali-soluble resin is a resin having a carboxyl group, the three-dimensional crosslinking density can be increased by adding a heat-crosslinking compound such as a blocked isocyanate compound to perform heat crosslinking. In addition, at this time, if the carboxyl group of the resin having a carboxyl group is dehydrated and hydrophobized, the moisture-heat resistance can be improved.

作為酸值60mgKOH/g以上的含有羧基之(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂,只要滿足上述酸值的條件,則沒有特別限制,能夠從公知的(甲基)丙烯酸樹脂中適當選擇。例如,能夠較佳地使用日本特開2011-095716號公報的[0025]段中記載之聚合物之中酸值60mgKOH/g以上的含有羧基之丙烯酸樹脂、及日本特開2010-237589號公報的[0033]~[0052]段中記載之聚合物之中酸值60mgKOH/g以上的含有羧基之丙烯酸樹脂等。The carboxyl group-containing (meth)acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH/g or more is not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the above acid value conditions, and can be appropriately selected from known (meth)acrylic resins. For example, among the polymers described in paragraph [0025] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-095716, carboxyl group-containing acrylic resins having an acid value of 60 mgKOH/g or more, and those of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-237589 can be suitably used. Among the polymers described in paragraphs [0033] to [0052], a carboxyl group-containing acrylic resin, etc., has an acid value of 60 mgKOH/g or more.

(鹼溶性樹脂的較佳態樣3) 又,作為鹼溶性樹脂的其他較佳態樣,就顯影性更優異的觀點而言,可舉出具有芳香環結構之鹼溶性樹脂。作為具有芳香環結構之鹼溶性樹脂,其中,含有具有芳香環結構之構成單元之鹼溶性樹脂為更佳。 作為形成具有芳香環結構之構成單元之單體,例如可舉出具有芳烷基之單體、苯乙烯及能夠聚合之苯乙烯衍生物(例如,甲基苯乙烯、乙烯基甲苯、三級丁氧基苯乙烯、乙醯氧基苯乙烯、4-乙烯基苯甲酸、苯乙烯二聚物及苯乙烯三聚物等)。其中,具有芳烷基之單體或苯乙烯為較佳。 作為芳烷基,可舉出經取代或未經取代之苯基烷基(苄基除外)及經取代或未經取代之苄基等,經取代或未經取代之苄基為較佳。 (Better version of alkali-soluble resin 3) In addition, as another preferred aspect of the alkali-soluble resin, from the viewpoint of more excellent developability, an alkali-soluble resin having an aromatic ring structure can be cited. As the alkali-soluble resin having an aromatic ring structure, an alkali-soluble resin containing a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure is more preferred. Examples of the monomer that forms the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure include a monomer having an aralkyl group, styrene, and polymerizable styrene derivatives (for example, methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, tertiary butyl Oxystyrene, acetyloxystyrene, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, styrene dimer and styrene trimer, etc.). Among them, a monomer having an aralkyl group or styrene is preferred. Examples of the aralkyl group include substituted or unsubstituted phenylalkyl groups (excluding benzyl groups) and substituted or unsubstituted benzyl groups, and substituted or unsubstituted benzyl groups are preferred.

作為具有苯基烷基之單體,可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸苯基乙酯等。Examples of the monomer having a phenylalkyl group include phenylethyl (meth)acrylate.

作為具有苄基之單體,可舉出具有苄基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯、例如(甲基)丙烯酸苄酯及(甲基)丙烯酸氯苄酯等;具有苄基之乙烯基單體、例如乙烯基苄基氯及乙烯基苯甲醇等。其中,(甲基)丙烯酸苄酯為較佳。Examples of the monomer having a benzyl group include (meth)acrylates having a benzyl group, such as benzyl (meth)acrylate and benzyl (meth)acrylate chloride, and the like; and vinyl monomers having a benzyl group, such as vinylbenzyl chloride and vinylbenzyl alcohol, and the like. Among them, benzyl (meth)acrylate is preferred.

又,鹼溶性樹脂具有下述式(S)所表示之構成單元(來自於苯乙烯之構成單元)為更佳。Moreover, it is more preferable that the alkali-soluble resin has a structural unit (a structural unit derived from styrene) represented by the following formula (S).

[化學式1] [Chemical formula 1]

在鹼溶性樹脂含有具有芳香環結構之構成單元之情況下,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,具有芳香環結構之構成單元的含量為5~90質量%為較佳,10~80質量%為更佳,10~70質量%為進一步較佳,20~60質量%為特佳。 又,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,鹼溶性樹脂中的具有芳香環結構之構成單元的含量為5~70莫耳%為較佳,10~60莫耳%為更佳,20~60莫耳%為進一步較佳。 此外,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,鹼溶性樹脂中的上述式(S)所表示之構成單元的含量為5~70莫耳%為較佳,10~60莫耳%為更佳,20~60莫耳%為進一步較佳,20~50莫耳%為特佳。 When the alkali-soluble resin contains a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure, the content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure is preferably 5 to 90% by mass, and 10 to 80% by mass relative to all the structural units of the alkali-soluble resin. It is more preferable, 10-70 mass % is further more preferable, and 20-60 mass % is especially preferable. Furthermore, the content of the structural units having an aromatic ring structure in the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, more preferably 10 to 60 mol%, and 20 to 60 mol% relative to all the structural units of the alkali-soluble resin. Mol% is further preferred. In addition, the content of the structural units represented by the above formula (S) in the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, and more preferably 10 to 60 mol%, based on all the structural units of the alkali-soluble resin. 20 to 60 mol% is more preferred, and 20 to 50 mol% is particularly preferred.

鹼溶性樹脂具有脂肪族烴環結構為較佳。亦即,鹼溶性樹脂含有具有脂肪族烴環結構之構成單元為較佳。作為脂肪族烴環結構,可以為單環,亦可以為多環。其中,鹼溶性樹脂具有2環以上的脂肪族烴環縮環而成之環結構為更佳。The alkali-soluble resin preferably has an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure. That is, the alkali-soluble resin preferably contains a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure. The aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure may be a single ring or a polycyclic ring. Among them, it is more preferable that the alkali-soluble resin has a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are condensed.

作為構成具有脂肪族烴環結構之構成單元中的脂肪族烴環結構之環,可舉出三環癸烷環、環己烷環、環戊烷環、降莰烷環及異硼烷環。 其中,2環以上的脂肪族烴環縮環而成之環為較佳,四氫二環戊二烯環(三環[5.2.1.0 2,6]癸烷環)為更佳。 作為形成具有脂肪族烴環結構之構成單元之單體,可舉出(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯及異莰(甲基)丙烯酸酯。 又,鹼溶性樹脂具有下述式(Cy)所表示之構成單元為較佳,具有上述式(S)所表示之構成單元及下述式(Cy)所表示之構成單元為更佳。 Examples of the ring of the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure include a tricyclodecane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a norbornane ring, and an isoborane ring. Among them, a ring formed by condensation of two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings is preferred, and a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring (tricyclo[5.2.1.0 2,6 ]decane ring) is more preferred. Examples of the monomer forming the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure include dicyclopentyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, and isobornyl (meth)acrylate. Furthermore, the alkali-soluble resin preferably has a constituent unit represented by the following formula (Cy), and more preferably has a constituent unit represented by the above formula (S) and a constituent unit represented by the following formula (Cy).

[化學式2] [Chemical formula 2]

式(Cy)中,R M表示氫原子或甲基,R Cy表示具有脂肪族烴環結構之1價的基。 In the formula (Cy), R M represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R Cy represents a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure.

式(Cy)中的R M為甲基為較佳。 式(Cy)中的R Cy為具有碳數5~20的脂肪族烴環結構之1價的基為較佳,具有碳數6~16的脂肪族烴環結構之1價的基為更佳,具有碳數8~14的脂肪族烴環結構之1價的基為進一步較佳。 又,式(Cy)的R Cy中的脂肪族烴環結構為環戊烷環結構、環己烷環結構、四氫二環戊二烯環結構、降莰烷環結構或異硼烷環結構為較佳,環己烷環結構或四氫二環戊二烯環結構為更佳,四氫二環戊二烯環結構為進一步較佳。 此外,式(Cy)的R Cy中的脂肪族烴環結構為2環以上的脂肪族烴環縮環而成之環結構為較佳,2~4環的脂肪族烴環縮環而成之環為更佳。 此外,式(Cy)中的R Cy為式(Cy)中的-C(=O)O-的氧原子與脂肪族烴環結構直接鍵結之基亦即脂肪族烴環基為較佳,環己基或二環戊基為更佳,二環戊基為進一步較佳。 RM in the formula (Cy) is preferably a methyl group. RCy in the formula (Cy) is preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure with 5 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure with 6 to 16 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure with 8 to 14 carbon atoms. Furthermore, the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in R Cy of the formula (Cy) is preferably a cyclopentane ring structure, a cyclohexane ring structure, a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure, a norbornane ring structure or an isoborane ring structure, more preferably a cyclohexane ring structure or a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure, and still more preferably a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure. Furthermore, the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in R Cy of the formula (Cy) is preferably a ring structure formed by condensing aliphatic hydrocarbons of 2 or more rings, and more preferably a ring structure formed by condensing aliphatic hydrocarbons of 2 to 4 rings. In addition, R Cy in the formula (Cy) is a group in which the oxygen atom of -C(=O)O- in the formula (Cy) is directly bonded to the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, that is, an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group is preferred, cyclohexyl or dicyclopentyl is more preferred, and dicyclopentyl is further preferred.

鹼溶性樹脂可以單獨具有1種具有脂肪族烴環結構之構成單元,亦可以具有2種以上。 在鹼溶性樹脂含有具有脂肪族烴環結構之構成單元之情況下,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,具有脂肪族烴環結構之構成單元的含量為5~90質量%為較佳,10~80質量%為更佳,20~70質量%為進一步較佳。 又,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,鹼溶性樹脂中的具有脂肪族烴環結構之構成單元的含量為5~70莫耳%為較佳,10~60莫耳%為更佳,20~50莫耳%為進一步較佳。 此外,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,鹼溶性樹脂中的上述式(Cy)所表示之構成單元的含量為5~70莫耳%為較佳,10~60莫耳%為更佳,20~50莫耳%為進一步較佳。 The alkali-soluble resin may have only one constituent unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, or may have two or more constituent units. When the alkali-soluble resin contains a constituent unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, the content of the constituent unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is preferably 5 to 90 mass %, more preferably 10 to 80 mass %, and further preferably 20 to 70 mass % relative to all constituent units of the alkali-soluble resin. In addition, the content of the constituent unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 5 to 70 mol %, more preferably 10 to 60 mol %, and further preferably 20 to 50 mol % relative to all constituent units of the alkali-soluble resin. In addition, relative to all constituent units of the alkali-soluble resin, the content of the constituent unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, more preferably 10 to 60 mol%, and even more preferably 20 to 50 mol%.

在鹼溶性樹脂含有具有芳香環結構之構成單元及具有脂肪族烴環結構之構成單元之情況下,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,具有芳香環結構之構成單元及具有脂肪族烴環結構之構成單元的總含量為10~90質量%為較佳,20~80質量%為更佳,40~75質量%為進一步較佳。 又,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,鹼溶性樹脂中的具有芳香環結構之構成單元及具有脂肪族烴環結構之構成單元的總含量為10~80莫耳%為較佳,20~70莫耳%為更佳,40~60莫耳%為進一步較佳。 此外,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,鹼溶性樹脂中的上述式(S)所表示之構成單元及上述式(Cy)所表示之構成單元的總含量為10~80莫耳%為較佳,20~70莫耳%為更佳,40~60莫耳%為進一步較佳。 When the alkali-soluble resin contains a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, with respect to all the structural units of the alkali-soluble resin, the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure The total content of the structural units is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, more preferably 20 to 80% by mass, and further preferably 40 to 75% by mass. Furthermore, the total content of the structural units having an aromatic ring structure and the structural units having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, and 20 to 80 mol% relative to all the structural units of the alkali-soluble resin. 70 mol% is more preferred, and 40 to 60 mol% is further preferred. In addition, the total content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the alkali-soluble resin is 10 to 80 mol% relative to all the structural units of the alkali-soluble resin. The best, 20 to 70 mol% is more preferred, and 40 to 60 mol% is still more preferred.

又,就本發明的效果更優異的觀點而言,鹼溶性樹脂中的上述式(S)所表示之構成單元的莫耳量nS和上述式(Cy)所表示之構成單元的莫耳量nCy滿足下述式(SCy)所示之關係為較佳,滿足下述式(SCy-1)為更佳,滿足下述式(SCy-2)為進一步較佳。 0.2≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.8   式(SCy) 0.30≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.75   式(SCy-1) 0.40≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.70   式(SCy-2) Furthermore, from the viewpoint of achieving a more excellent effect of the present invention, the molar amount nS of the constituent unit represented by the above formula (S) and the molar amount nCy of the constituent unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the alkali-soluble resin preferably satisfy the relationship shown in the following formula (SCy), more preferably satisfy the following formula (SCy-1), and even more preferably satisfy the following formula (SCy-2). 0.2≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.8   Formula (SCy) 0.30≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.75   Formula (SCy-1) 0.40≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.70   Formula (SCy-2)

鹼溶性樹脂含有具有酸基之構成單元亦較佳。 作為上述酸基,可舉出羧基、磺酸基、膦酸基及磷酸基,羧基為較佳。 作為具有上述酸基之構成單元,下述所示之來自於(甲基)丙烯酸之構成單元為較佳,來自於甲基丙烯酸之構成單元為更佳。 It is also preferable that the alkali-soluble resin contains a structural unit having an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphonic acid group and a phosphoric acid group, with a carboxyl group being preferred. As the structural unit having the above-mentioned acid group, the structural unit derived from (meth)acrylic acid shown below is preferable, and the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid is more preferable.

[化學式3] [Chemical formula 3]

鹼溶性樹脂可以單獨具有1種具有酸基之構成單元,亦可以具有2種以上。 在鹼溶性樹脂含有具有酸基之構成單元之情況下,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,具有酸基之構成單元的含量為5~50質量%為較佳,5~40質量%為更佳,10~40質量%為進一步較佳,10~30質量%為特佳。 又,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,鹼溶性樹脂中的具有酸基之構成單元的含量為5~70莫耳%為較佳,10~50莫耳%為更佳,20~40莫耳%為進一步較佳。 The alkali-soluble resin may have one type of structural unit having an acid group alone, or may have two or more types. When the alkali-soluble resin contains a structural unit having an acid group, the content of the structural unit having an acid group is preferably 5 to 50 mass %, and more preferably 5 to 40 mass %, relative to all the structural units of the alkali-soluble resin. The content is preferably 10 to 40% by mass, and is further preferably 10 to 30% by mass, and is particularly preferably 10 to 30% by mass. Furthermore, the content of the structural units having acidic groups in the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol%, and 20 to 40 mol% relative to all the structural units of the alkali-soluble resin. Ear% is further preferred.

鹼溶性樹脂具有反應性基為較佳,含有具有反應性基之構成單元為更佳。 作為反應性基,自由基聚合性基為較佳,乙烯性不飽和基為更佳。又,在鹼溶性樹脂具有乙烯性不飽和基之情況下,鹼溶性樹脂具有在側鏈中具有乙烯性不飽和基之構成單元為較佳。 在本說明書中,“主鏈”表示構成樹脂之高分子化合物的分子中相對最長的鍵結鏈,“側鏈”表示從主鏈分支之原子團。 作為乙烯性不飽和基,烯丙基或(甲基)丙烯醯氧基為更佳。 作為具有反應性基之構成單元的一例,可舉出下述所示者,但並不限定於該等。 It is preferable that the alkali-soluble resin has a reactive group, and it is more preferable that it contains a structural unit having a reactive group. As the reactive group, a radically polymerizable group is preferred, and an ethylenically unsaturated group is more preferred. Moreover, when the alkali-soluble resin has an ethylenically unsaturated group, it is preferable that the alkali-soluble resin has a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in a side chain. In this specification, the "main chain" refers to the relatively longest bonding chain among the molecules of the polymer compound constituting the resin, and the "side chain" refers to the atomic groups branched from the main chain. As the ethylenically unsaturated group, an allyl group or a (meth)acryloxy group is more preferred. Examples of the structural unit having a reactive group include, but are not limited to, those shown below.

[化學式4] [Chemical formula 4]

鹼溶性樹脂可以單獨具有1種具有反應性基之構成單元,亦可以具有2種以上。 在鹼溶性樹脂含有具有反應性基之構成單元之情況下,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,具有反應性基之構成單元的含量為5~70質量%為較佳,10~50質量%為更佳,20~40質量%為進一步較佳。 又,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,鹼溶性樹脂中的具有反應性基之構成單元的含量為5~70莫耳%為較佳,10~60莫耳%為更佳,10~50莫耳%為進一步較佳。 The alkali-soluble resin may have one type of structural unit having a reactive group alone, or may have two or more types. When the alkali-soluble resin contains a structural unit having a reactive group, the content of the structural unit having a reactive group is preferably 5 to 70% by mass, and 10 to 50% by mass relative to all the structural units of the alkali-soluble resin. It is more preferable, and 20-40 mass % is still more preferable. Furthermore, the content of the structural units having reactive groups in the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, more preferably 10 to 60 mol%, and 10 to 50 mol% relative to all the structural units of the alkali-soluble resin. Mol% is further preferred.

作為將反應性基導入到鹼溶性樹脂之機構,可舉出使羥基、羧基、第一級胺基、第二級胺基、乙醯乙醯基及磺酸基等官能基與環氧化合物、封端異氰酸酯化合物、異氰酸酯化合物、乙烯碸化合物、醛化合物、羥甲基及羧酸酐等化合物反應之方法。 作為將反應性基導入到鹼溶性樹脂中之方法的較佳例,可舉出藉由聚合反應而合成具有羧基之聚合物之後,藉由高分子反應而使(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油酯與所得到之聚合物的羧基的一部分進行反應而將(甲基)丙烯醯氧基導入到聚合物中之方法。藉由該機構,能夠得到在側鏈中具有(甲基)丙烯醯氧基之鹼溶性樹脂。 上述聚合反應在70~100℃的溫度條件下進行為較佳,在80~90℃的溫度條件下進行為更佳。作為用於上述聚合反應之聚合起始劑,偶氮系起始劑為較佳,例如,FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation製造的V-601(商品名稱)或V-65(商品名稱)為更佳。上述高分子反應在80~110℃的溫度條件下進行為較佳。在上述高分子反應中,使用銨鹽等觸媒為較佳。 As a mechanism for introducing reactive groups into alkali-soluble resins, functional groups such as hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, primary amino groups, secondary amino groups, acetoacetyl groups, and sulfonic acid groups are combined with epoxy compounds, Method for reacting blocked isocyanate compounds, isocyanate compounds, vinyl compounds, aldehyde compounds, hydroxymethyl and carboxylic acid anhydride and other compounds. As a preferred example of the method of introducing a reactive group into an alkali-soluble resin, a polymer having a carboxyl group is synthesized by polymerization reaction, and then glycidyl (meth)acrylate and glycidyl (meth)acrylate are reacted by a polymer reaction. A method in which a part of the carboxyl groups of the obtained polymer reacts to introduce (meth)acryloxy groups into the polymer. By this mechanism, an alkali-soluble resin having a (meth)acryloxy group in the side chain can be obtained. The above-mentioned polymerization reaction is preferably carried out at a temperature of 70 to 100°C, and more preferably at a temperature of 80 to 90°C. As the polymerization initiator used in the above-mentioned polymerization reaction, an azo-based initiator is preferred, and for example, V-601 (trade name) or V-65 (trade name) manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation is more preferred. The above-mentioned polymer reaction is preferably carried out at a temperature of 80 to 110°C. In the above-mentioned polymer reaction, it is better to use catalysts such as ammonium salts.

又,鹼溶性樹脂具有來自於(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元亦較佳。 作為上述來自於(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元,可舉出上述構成單元,其中,(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯為較佳。 鹼溶性樹脂可以單獨具有1種來自於(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元,亦可以具有2種以上。 在鹼溶性樹脂具有來自於(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元之情況下,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,來自於(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元的含量為1~10質量%為較佳,1~5質量%為更佳。 又,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的所有構成單元,鹼溶性樹脂中的來自於(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯之構成單元的含量為1~10莫耳%為較佳,1~5莫耳%為更佳。 Furthermore, it is also preferred that the alkali-soluble resin has a constituent unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. As the constituent unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate, the above-mentioned constituent units can be cited, among which methyl (meth)acrylate is preferred. The alkali-soluble resin may have one constituent unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate alone, or may have two or more constituent units. When the alkali-soluble resin has a constituent unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate, the content of the constituent unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate is preferably 1 to 10% by mass, and more preferably 1 to 5% by mass, relative to all the constituent units of the alkali-soluble resin. Furthermore, relative to all constituent units of the alkali-soluble resin, the content of constituent units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylate in the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1 to 10 mol%, and more preferably 1 to 5 mol%.

(較佳態樣1~3的鹼溶性樹脂的具體的一例) 作為鹼溶性樹脂,以下所示之聚合物X1~X4為較佳。另外,以下所示之相對於所有構成單元的各構成單元的含有比率(a~d)及重量平均分子量Mw等能夠依據目的適當變更,但就本發明之效果更優異的觀點而言,其中,以下構成為較佳。 (聚合物X1) a:20~60質量%,b:10~50質量%,c:5.0~25質量%,d:10~50質量%。 (聚合物X2) a:20~60質量%,b:10~50質量%,c:5.0~25質量%,d:10~50質量%。 (聚合物X3) a:30~65質量%,b:1.0~30質量%,c:0.5~15質量%,d:10~50質量%。 (聚合物X4) a:1.0~20質量%,b:20~60質量%,c:5.0~230質量%,d:10~50質量%。 (A specific example of the alkali-soluble resin of preferred aspects 1 to 3) As the alkali-soluble resin, polymers X1 to X4 shown below are preferred. In addition, the content ratios (a to d) of each structural unit and the weight average molecular weight Mw shown below with respect to all structural units can be appropriately changed depending on the purpose. However, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent, among them, The following configuration is preferred. (Polymer X1) a: 20 to 60 mass%, b: 10 to 50 mass%, c: 5.0 to 25 mass%, d: 10 to 50 mass%. (Polymer X2) a: 20 to 60 mass%, b: 10 to 50 mass%, c: 5.0 to 25 mass%, d: 10 to 50 mass%. (Polymer X3) a: 30 to 65 mass%, b: 1.0 to 30 mass%, c: 0.5 to 15 mass%, d: 10 to 50 mass%. (Polymer X4) a: 1.0 to 20 mass%, b: 20 to 60 mass%, c: 5.0 to 230 mass%, d: 10 to 50 mass%.

[化學式5] [Chemical formula 5]

(鹼溶性樹脂的較佳態樣4) 作為鹼溶性樹脂,使用含有具有羧酸酐結構之構成單元之聚合物(以下,亦稱為“聚合物X”。)為較佳。 羧酸酐結構可以為鏈狀羧酸酐結構及環狀羧酸酐結構中的任一個,但環狀羧酸酐結構為較佳。 作為環狀羧酸酐結構的環,5~7員環為較佳,5員環或6員環為更佳,5員環為進一步較佳。 (Preferred embodiment 4 of the alkali-soluble resin) As the alkali-soluble resin, it is preferred to use a polymer containing a constituent unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure (hereinafter, also referred to as "polymer X"). The carboxylic acid anhydride structure may be any of a chain carboxylic acid anhydride structure and a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure, but a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure is preferred. As the ring of the cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure, a 5- to 7-membered ring is preferred, a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is more preferred, and a 5-membered ring is further preferred.

具有羧酸酐結構之構成單元為在主鏈中包含從下述式P-1所表示之化合物去除2個氫原子而得之2價的基之構成單元或從下述式P-1所表示之化合物去除1個氫原子而得之1價的基直接或經由2價的連結基鍵結之構成單元為較佳。The structural unit having a carboxylic anhydride structure is preferably a structural unit containing a divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the compound represented by the following formula P-1 in the main chain, or a structural unit in which a monovalent group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the compound represented by the following formula P-1 is bonded directly or via a divalent linking group.

[化學式6] [Chemical formula 6]

式P-1中,R A1a表示取代基,n 1a個R A1a可以相同,亦可以不同,Z 1a表示形成含有-C(=O)-O-C(=O)-之環之2價的基,n 1a表示0以上的整數。 In formula P-1, RA1a represents a substituent, n1a RA1a may be the same or different, Z1a represents a divalent group forming a ring containing -C(=O)-OC(=O)-, and n1a represents an integer greater than 0.

作為R A1a所表示之取代基,例如可舉出烷基。 作為Z 1a,碳數2~4的伸烷基為較佳,碳數2或3的伸烷基為更佳,碳數2的伸烷基為進一步較佳。 n 1a表示0以上的整數。當Z 1a表示碳數2~4的伸烷基時,n 1a為0~4的整數為較佳,0~2的整數為更佳,0為進一步較佳。 當n 1a表示2以上的整數時,存在複數個之R A1a可以相同,亦可不同。又,存在複數個之R A1a可以彼此鍵結形成環,但不彼此鍵結形成環為較佳。 As the substituent represented by R A1a , for example, an alkyl group can be mentioned. As Z 1a , an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms is preferred, an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms is more preferred, and an alkylene group having 2 carbon atoms is further preferred. n 1a represents an integer of 0 or more. When Z 1a represents an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, n 1a is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and further preferably 0. When n 1a represents an integer of 2 or more, plural R A1a may be the same or different. In addition, plural R A1a may be bonded to each other to form a ring, but it is preferred that they do not bond to each other to form a ring.

作為具有羧酸酐結構之構成單元,來自於不飽和羧酸酐之構成單元為較佳,來自於不飽和環式羧酸酐之構成單元為更佳,來自於不飽和脂肪族環式羧酸酐之構成單元為進一步較佳,來自於順丁烯二酸酐或衣康酸酐之構成單元為特佳,來自於順丁烯二酸酐之構成單元為最佳。As the constituent unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure, a constituent unit derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid anhydride is preferred, a constituent unit derived from an unsaturated cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride is more preferred, a constituent unit derived from an unsaturated aliphatic cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride is further preferred, a constituent unit derived from maleic anhydride or itaconic anhydride is particularly preferred, and a constituent unit derived from maleic anhydride is the most preferred.

以下,舉出具有羧酸酐結構之構成單元的具體例,但是具有羧酸酐結構之構成單元並不限定於該等具體例。下述構成單元中,Rx表示氫原子、甲基、CH 2OH基或CF 3基,Me表示甲基。 Specific examples of the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure are given below, but the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is not limited to these specific examples. In the structural unit below, Rx represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a CH2OH group or a CF3 group, and Me represents a methyl group.

[化學式7] [Chemical formula 7]

[化學式8] [Chemical formula 8]

聚合物X中的具有羧酸酐結構之構成單元可以為單獨1種,亦可以為2種以上。 相對於聚合物X的所有構成單元,具有羧酸酐結構之構成單元的總含量為0~60莫耳%為較佳,5~40莫耳%為更佳,10~35莫耳%為進一步較佳。 The constituent units having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure in the polymer X may be a single type or may be two or more types. The total content of the constituent units having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure relative to all the constituent units of the polymer X is preferably 0 to 60 mol%, more preferably 5 to 40 mol%, and even more preferably 10 to 35 mol%.

聚合物X與上述較佳態樣1~3中的任一種鹼溶性樹脂併用而使用為較佳。 在感光性層包含聚合物X之情況下,聚合物X的含量相對於感光性層的總質量為0.1~30質量%為較佳,0.2~20質量%為更佳,0.5~20質量%為進一步較佳,1~20質量%為特佳。 感光性層中,可以僅包含1種聚合物X,亦可以包含2種以上。 Polymer X is preferably used in combination with any alkali-soluble resin in the above-mentioned preferred aspects 1 to 3. When the photosensitive layer contains the polymer X, the content of the polymer More preferably, 1 to 20% by mass is particularly preferred. The photosensitive layer may contain only 1 type of polymer X, or may contain 2 or more types.

鹼溶性樹脂的重量平均分子量(Mw)為3,500以上為較佳,5,000以上為更佳,10,000以上為進一步較佳,20,000以上為特佳。作為上限值,50,000以下為較佳,30,000以下為更佳。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 3,500 or more, more preferably 5,000 or more, further preferably 10,000 or more, and particularly preferably 20,000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 50,000 or less, and more preferably 30,000 or less.

鹼溶性樹脂的酸值為10~200mgKOH/g為較佳,60~200mgKOH/g為更佳,60~150mgKOH/g為進一步較佳,70~125mgKOH/g為特佳。另外,鹼溶性樹脂的酸值為依據JIS K0070:1992中記載之方法測量之值。 就顯影性的觀點而言,鹼溶性樹脂的分散度為1.0~6.0為較佳,1.0~5.0為更佳,1.0~4.0為進一步較佳,1.0~3.0為特佳。 The acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 10 to 200 mgKOH/g, more preferably 60 to 200 mgKOH/g, further preferably 60 to 150 mgKOH/g, and particularly preferably 70 to 125 mgKOH/g. In addition, the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is a value measured according to the method described in JIS K0070: 1992. From the viewpoint of developing properties, the dispersion degree of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, further preferably 1.0 to 4.0, and particularly preferably 1.0 to 3.0.

感光性層可以僅包含1種鹼溶性樹脂,亦可以包含2種以上。 作為鹼溶性樹脂的含量的下限值,相對於感光性層的總質量,10.0質量%以上為較佳,15.0質量%以上為更佳,20.0質量%以上為進一步較佳,30.0質量%以上為特佳。又,作為上限值,90.0質量%以下為較佳,80.0質量%以下為更佳,70.0質量%以下為進一步較佳。 The photosensitive layer may contain only one type of alkali-soluble resin, or may contain two or more types. The lower limit of the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 10.0 mass% or more, more preferably 15.0 mass% or more, further preferably 20.0 mass% or more, and 30.0 mass% or more relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Excellent. Moreover, as an upper limit value, 90.0 mass % or less is preferable, 80.0 mass % or less is more preferable, and 70.0 mass % or less is still more preferable.

-聚合性化合物- 感光性層包含聚合性化合物為較佳。 聚合性化合物為具有聚合性基之化合物。作為聚合性基,例如可舉出自由基聚合性基及陽離子聚合性基,自由基聚合性基為較佳。 -Polymerizable compound- The photosensitive layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound. The polymerizable compound is a compound having a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include free radical polymerizable groups and cationic polymerizable groups, and free radical polymerizable groups are preferred.

聚合性化合物包含具有乙烯性不飽和基之自由基聚合性化合物(以下,亦簡稱為“乙烯性不飽和化合物”。)為較佳。 作為乙烯性不飽和基,(甲基)丙烯醯氧基為較佳。 另外,本說明書中的乙烯性不飽和化合物為除上述鹼溶性樹脂以外的化合物,分子量小於5,000為較佳。 The polymerizable compound preferably contains a radically polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group (hereinafter, also simply referred to as an “ethylenically unsaturated compound”). As the ethylenically unsaturated group, a (meth)acryloxy group is preferred. In addition, the ethylenically unsaturated compound in this specification is a compound other than the alkali-soluble resin mentioned above, and it is preferable that the molecular weight is less than 5,000.

作為聚合性化合物的較佳態樣之一,可舉出下述式(M)所表示之化合物(亦簡稱為“化合物M”。)。 Q 2-R 1-Q 1式(M) 式(M)中,Q 1及Q 2分別獨立地表示(甲基)丙烯醯氧基,R 1表示具有鏈狀結構之2價的連結基。 One of the preferred aspects of the polymerizable compound is a compound represented by the following formula (M) (also simply referred to as "compound M"). Q 2 -R 1 -Q 1 Formula (M) In the formula (M), Q 1 and Q 2 each independently represent a (meth)acryloxy group, and R 1 represents a divalent linking group having a chain structure.

式(M)中的Q 1及Q 2就合成容易性的觀點而言,Q 1及Q 2為相同的基為較佳。 又,就反應性的觀點而言,式(M)中的Q 1及Q 2為丙烯醯氧基為較佳。 作為式(M)中的R 1,伸烷基、伸烷氧基伸烷基(-L 1-O-L 1-)或聚伸烷氧基伸烷基(-(L 1-O) p-L 1-)為較佳,碳數2~20的烴基或聚伸烷氧基伸烷基為更佳,碳數4~20的伸烷基為進一步較佳,碳數6~18的直鏈伸烷基為特佳。 上述烴基只要在至少一部分具有鏈狀結構即可,作為除上述鏈狀結構以外的部分,沒有特別限制,例如可以為支鏈狀、環狀或碳數1~5的直鏈狀伸烷基、伸芳基、醚鍵及它們的組合中的任一種,伸烷基或將2個以上的伸烷基與1個以上的伸芳基組合而成之基為較佳,伸烷基為更佳,直鏈伸烷基為進一步較佳。 另外,上述L 1分別獨立地表示伸烷基,伸乙基、伸丙基或伸丁基為較佳,伸乙基或1,2-伸丙基為更佳。p表示2以上的整數,2~10的整數為較佳。 From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, Q 1 and Q 2 in formula (M) are preferably the same group. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of reactivity, Q 1 and Q 2 in formula (M) are preferably acryloyloxy groups. As R 1 in the formula (M), an alkylene group, an alkoxyalkylene group (-L 1 -OL 1 -) or a polyalkyleneoxyalkylene group (-(L 1 -O) p -L 1 - ) is preferred, a hydrocarbon group or a polyalkyleneoxy alkylene group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferred, an alkylene group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms is further preferred, and a straight chain alkylene group having 6 to 18 carbon atoms is Excellent. The above-mentioned hydrocarbon group only needs to have a chain structure in at least part of it. The part other than the above-mentioned chain structure is not particularly limited. For example, it may be a branched, cyclic or linear alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. Any of an aryl group, an ether bond and a combination thereof, an alkylene group or a combination of two or more alkylene groups and one or more aryl groups is preferred, and an alkylene group is more preferred , a straight chain alkylene group is further preferred. In addition, the above-mentioned L 1 each independently represents an alkylene group, preferably an ethylene group, a propylene group or a butylene group, and more preferably an ethylene group or a 1,2-propylene group. p represents an integer of 2 or more, and an integer of 2 to 10 is preferred.

又,化合物M中的連接Q 1與Q 2之間的最短連接鏈的原子數為3~50個為較佳,4~40個為更佳,6~20個為進一步較佳,8~12個為特佳。 在本說明書中,“連結Q 1與Q 2之間之最短的連結鏈的原子數”為連結從與Q 1連結之R 1中的原子至與Q 2連結之R 1中的原子之最短的連結鍵的原子數。 In addition, the number of atoms in the shortest link between Q1 and Q2 in compound M is preferably 3 to 50, more preferably 4 to 40, further preferably 6 to 20, and particularly preferably 8 to 12. In the present specification, "the number of atoms in the shortest link between Q1 and Q2 " means the number of atoms in the shortest bond from the atom in R1 linked to Q1 to the atom in R1 linked to Q2 .

作為化合物M的具體例,可舉出1,3-丁二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、四亞甲基二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,6-己二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,7-庚二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,8-辛二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,9-壬二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,10-癸二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、氫化雙酚A的二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、氫化雙酚F的二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚(乙二醇/丙二醇)二(甲基)丙烯酸酯及聚丁二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯。上述酯單體亦能夠用作混合物。 在上述化合物中,選自包括1,6-己二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,9-壬二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,10-癸二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯及新戊二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯之群組中之至少1種化合物為較佳,選自包括1,6-己二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,9-壬二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯及1,10-癸二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯之群組中之至少1種化合物為更佳,選自包括1,9-壬二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯及1,10-癸二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯之群組中之至少1種化合物為進一步較佳。 Specific examples of compound M include 1,3-butanediol di(meth)acrylate, tetramethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,7-heptanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,8-octanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di(meth)acrylate, hydrogenated bisphenol A di(meth)acrylate, hydrogenated bisphenol F di(meth)acrylate, polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, poly(ethylene glycol/propylene glycol) di(meth)acrylate, and polybutylene glycol di(meth)acrylate. The above ester monomers can also be used as a mixture. Among the above compounds, at least one compound selected from the group including 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di(meth)acrylate and neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate is preferred, at least one compound selected from the group including 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di(meth)acrylate and 1,10-decanediol di(meth)acrylate is more preferred, and at least one compound selected from the group including 1,9-nonanediol di(meth)acrylate and 1,10-decanediol di(meth)acrylate is further preferred.

又,作為聚合性化合物的較佳態樣之一,可舉出2官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物。 在本說明書中,“2官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物”係指在一個分子中具有2個以上乙烯性不飽和基之化合物。 作為乙烯性不飽和化合物中的乙烯性不飽和基,(甲基)丙烯醯基為較佳。 作為乙烯性不飽和化合物,(甲基)丙烯酸酯化合物為較佳。 Furthermore, one of the preferred aspects of the polymerizable compound includes a bifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound. In this specification, a "bifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound" refers to a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule. As the ethylenically unsaturated group in the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth)acrylyl group is preferred. As the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth)acrylate compound is preferred.

作為2官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物,能夠從公知的化合物的中適當選擇。 作為上述化合物M以外的2官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物,可舉出三環癸烷二甲醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯及1,4-環己二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯。 As the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound, it is possible to appropriately select from known compounds. As bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds other than the above-mentioned compound M, tricyclodecanedimethanol di(meth)acrylate and 1,4-cyclohexanediol di(meth)acrylate can be cited.

作為2官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物的市售品,可舉出三環癸烷二甲醇二丙烯酸酯(產品名稱:NK Ester A-DCP、Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造)、三環癸烷二甲醇二甲基丙烯酸酯(產品名稱:NK Ester DCP、Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造)、1,9-壬二醇二丙烯酸酯(產品名稱:NK Ester A-NOD-N、Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造)、1,6-己二醇二丙烯酸酯(產品名稱:NK Ester A-HD-N、Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造)。Commercially available products of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound include tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (product name: NK Ester A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), tricyclodecanedimethanol dimethacrylate (product name: NK Ester DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (product name: NK Ester A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (product name: NK Ester A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.).

作為3官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物,能夠從公知的化合物的中適當選擇。 作為3官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物,可舉出二新戊四醇(三/四/五/六)(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇(三/四)(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二三羥甲基丙烷四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、異三聚氰酸(甲基)丙烯酸酯及甘油三(甲基)丙烯酸酯骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯化合物。 The trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound can be appropriately selected from known compounds. Examples of trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds include dineopenterythritol (tri/tetra/penta/hexa)(meth)acrylate and neopentylerythritol (tri/tetra)(meth)acrylate. , trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, ditrimethylolpropane tetra(meth)acrylate, isocyanuric acid (meth)acrylate and glyceryl tri(meth)acrylate skeleton (meth)acrylate compounds.

在此,“(三/四/五/六)(甲基)丙烯酸酯”為包含三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、五(甲基)丙烯酸酯及六(甲基)丙烯酸酯之概念,“(三/四)(甲基)丙烯酸酯”為包含三(甲基)丙烯酸酯及四(甲基)丙烯酸酯之概念。Here, "(tri/tetra/penta/hexa)(meth)acrylate" includes tri(meth)acrylate, tetra(meth)acrylate, penta(meth)acrylate and hexa(meth)acrylate. ) The concept of acrylate, "(tri/tetra)(meth)acrylate" is a concept that includes tri(meth)acrylate and tetra(meth)acrylate.

作為聚合性化合物的較佳態樣之一,還可舉出胺酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯化合物。 作為胺酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯,可舉出胺酯二(甲基)丙烯酸酯,例如可舉出環氧丙烷改質胺酯二(甲基)丙烯酸酯以及環氧乙烷及環氧丙烷改質胺基甲酸酯二(甲基)丙烯酸酯。 又,作為胺酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯,還可舉出3官能以上的胺酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯。作為官能基數的下限,6官能以上為更佳,8官能以上為進一步較佳。另外,作為官能基數的上限,20官能以下為較佳。作為3官能以上的胺酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯,例如可舉出8UX-015A(Taisei Fine Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造)、UA-32P(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造)、U-15HA(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造)、UA-1100H(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造)、Kyoeisha Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造的AH-600(商品名)以及UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、UA-510H及UX-5000(均為Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製造)等。 As one of the preferred forms of polymerizable compounds, amine (meth)acrylate compounds can also be cited. As amine (meth)acrylates, amine di(meth)acrylates can be cited, for example, propylene oxide modified amine di(meth)acrylates and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide modified urethane di(meth)acrylates can be cited. In addition, as amine (meth)acrylates, amine (meth)acrylates with three or more functions can also be cited. As the lower limit of the number of functional groups, 6 or more functions are more preferred, and 8 or more functions are further preferred. In addition, as the upper limit of the number of functional groups, 20 or less functions are preferred. Examples of trifunctional or higher amine (meth)acrylates include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), U-15HA (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), AH-600 (trade name) manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., and UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, UA-510H, and UX-5000 (all manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).

作為聚合性化合物的較佳態樣之一,還可舉出具有酸基之乙烯性不飽和化合物。 作為酸基,可舉出磷酸基、磺酸基及羧基。 在該等之中,作為酸基,羧基為較佳。 作為具有酸基之乙烯性不飽和化合物,可舉出具有酸基之3~4官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物〔在新戊四醇三及四丙烯酸酯(PETA)骨架中導入有羧基者(酸值:80~120mgKOH/g)〕、具有酸基之5~6官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物(在二新戊四醇五及六丙烯酸酯(DPHA)骨架中導入有羧基者〔酸值:25~70mgKOH/g)〕等。 該等具有酸基之3官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物可以依據需要併用具有酸基之2官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物。 As one of the preferred forms of polymerizable compounds, ethylenically unsaturated compounds having an acid group can also be cited. As the acid group, phosphoric acid group, sulfonic acid group and carboxyl group can be cited. Among them, carboxyl group is preferred as the acid group. As the ethylenically unsaturated compounds having an acid group, ethylenically unsaturated compounds having 3-4 functions (carboxyl groups introduced into the backbone of pentaerythritol tri- and tetraacrylate (PETA) (acid value: 80-120 mgKOH/g)), ethylenically unsaturated compounds having 5-6 functions (carboxyl groups introduced into the backbone of dipentaerythritol penta- and hexaacrylate (DPHA) (acid value: 25-70 mgKOH/g)) and the like can be cited. The trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds having an acid group may be used together with a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group as needed.

作為具有酸基之乙烯性不飽和化合物,選自包括具有羧基之2官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物及其羧酸酐之群組中之至少1種為較佳。 若具有酸基之乙烯性不飽和化合物為選自包括具有羧基之2官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物及其羧酸酐之群組中之至少1種,則顯影性及膜強度進一步提高。 具有羧基之2官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物不受特別限制,能夠從公知的化合物中適當選擇。 作為具有羧基之2官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物,可舉出ARONIX(註冊商標)TO-2349(TOAGOSEI CO.,LTD.製造)、ARONIX(註冊商標)M-520(TOAGOSEI CO.,LTD.製造)、ARONIX(註冊商標)M-510(TOAGOSEI CO.,LTD.製造)。 As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, at least one selected from the group including bifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds having a carboxyl group and their carboxylic anhydrides is preferred. If the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is at least one selected from the group including bifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds having a carboxyl group and their carboxylic anhydrides, the developing property and the film strength are further improved. The bifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxyl group is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known compounds. As bifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compounds having a carboxyl group, there are ARONIX (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.), ARONIX (registered trademark) M-520 (manufactured by TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.), and ARONIX (registered trademark) M-510 (manufactured by TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.).

作為具有酸基之乙烯性不飽和化合物,日本特開2004-239942號公報的[0025]~[0030]段中記載之具有酸基之聚合性化合物為較佳,該公報中記載之內容被編入本說明書中。As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, the polymerizable compound having an acid group described in paragraphs [0025] to [0030] of Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-239942 is preferred, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in this manual.

作為聚合性化合物,例如還可舉出使α,β-不飽和羧酸與多元醇進行反應而得到之化合物、使α,β-不飽和羧酸與含有環氧丙基之化合物進行反應而得到之化合物、具有胺酯鍵之(甲基)丙烯酸酯化合物等胺酯單體、γ-氯-β-羥基丙基-β’-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基-鄰苯二甲酸酯、β-羥基乙基-β’-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基-鄰苯二甲酸酯及β-羥基丙基-β’-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基-鄰苯二甲酸酯等鄰苯二甲酸系化合物以及(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯。 該等被單獨使用或者組合使用2種以上。 Examples of the polymerizable compound include a compound obtained by reacting an α,β-unsaturated carboxylic acid and a polyhydric alcohol, and a compound obtained by reacting an α,β-unsaturated carboxylic acid and a compound containing an glycidyl group. Compounds, amine ester monomers such as (meth)acrylate compounds with amine ester bonds, γ-chloro-β-hydroxypropyl-β'-(meth)acryloxyethyl-phthalic acid Ester, β-hydroxyethyl-β'-(meth)acryloxyethyl-phthalate and β-hydroxypropyl-β'-(meth)acryloxyethyl-phthalate Phthalate compounds such as phthalate esters and alkyl (meth)acrylates. These are used individually or in combination of 2 or more types.

作為使α,β-不飽和羧酸與多元醇進行反應而得到之化合物,例如可舉出2,2-雙(4-((甲基)丙烯醯氧基聚乙氧基)苯基)丙烷、2,2-雙(4-((甲基)丙烯醯氧基聚丙氧基)苯基)丙烷及2,2-雙(4-((甲基)丙烯醯氧基聚乙氧基聚丙氧基)苯基)丙烷等雙酚A系(甲基)丙烯酸酯化合物、環氧乙烷基的數量為2~14的聚乙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、環氧丙烷基的數量為2~14的聚丙二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、環氧乙烷基的數量為2~14且環氧丙烷基的數量為2~14的聚乙二醇聚丙二醇(polyethylene polypropylene glycol)二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷乙氧基三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷二乙氧基三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三乙氧基三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷四乙氧基三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷五乙氧基三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二(三羥甲基丙烷)四丙烯酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇五(甲基)丙烯酸酯以及二新戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯。 其中,具有四羥甲基甲烷結構或三羥甲基丙烷結構之乙烯不飽和化合物為較佳,四羥甲基甲烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯或二(三羥甲基丙烷)四丙烯酸酯為更佳。 Examples of the compound obtained by reacting an α,β-unsaturated carboxylic acid with a polyol include bisphenol A-based (meth)acrylate compounds such as 2,2-bis(4-((meth)acryloxypolyethoxy)phenyl)propane, 2,2-bis(4-((meth)acryloxypolypropoxy)phenyl)propane, and 2,2-bis(4-((meth)acryloxypolyethoxypolypropoxy)phenyl)propane, polyethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate having 2 to 14 ethylene oxide groups, polypropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate having 2 to 14 propylene oxide groups, and polyethylene glycol polypropylene glycol having 2 to 14 ethylene oxide groups and 2 to 14 propylene oxide groups. glycol) di(meth)acrylate, trihydroxymethylpropane di(meth)acrylate, trihydroxymethylpropane tri(meth)acrylate, trihydroxymethylpropane ethoxy tri(meth)acrylate, trihydroxymethylpropane diethoxy tri(meth)acrylate, trihydroxymethylpropane triethoxy tri(meth)acrylate, trihydroxymethylpropane tetraethoxy tri(meth)acrylate, trihydroxymethylpropane pentaethoxy tri(meth)acrylate, di(trihydroxymethylpropane) tetraacrylate, tetrahydroxymethylmethane tri(meth)acrylate, tetrahydroxymethylmethane tetra(meth)acrylate, dipentatriol tetra(meth)acrylate, dipentatriol penta(meth)acrylate and dipentatriol hexa(meth)acrylate. Among them, ethylene unsaturated compounds having a tetrahydroxymethylmethane structure or a trihydroxymethylpropane structure are preferred, and tetrahydroxymethylmethane tri(meth)acrylate, tetrahydroxymethylmethane tetra(meth)acrylate, trihydroxymethylpropane tri(meth)acrylate or di(trihydroxymethylpropane)tetraacrylate are more preferred.

作為聚合性化合物,還可舉出乙烯性不飽和化合物的己內酯改質化合物(例如,Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製造的KAYARAD(註冊商標)DPCA-20、Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造的A-9300-1CL等)、乙烯性不飽和化合物的環氧烷改質化合物(例如,Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製造的KAYARAD RP-1040、Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造的ATM-35E、A-9300、DAICEL-ALLNEX LTD.製造的EBECRYL(註冊商標)135等)、乙氧基化甘油三丙烯酸酯(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造的A-GLY-9E等)等。 又,作為聚合性化合物,還可舉出雙丙烯酸(2,2-二甲基乙烯)(5-乙基-1,3-二口咢口山-2,5-二基)亞甲基(Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製造的KAYARAD R-604)等。 As polymerizable compounds, there can also be cited caprolactone-modified compounds of ethylenically unsaturated compounds (e.g., KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., etc.), oxirane-modified compounds of ethylenically unsaturated compounds (e.g., KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E, A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., EBECRYL (registered trademark) 135 manufactured by DAICEL-ALLNEX LTD., etc.), ethoxylated glyceryl triacrylate (A-GLY-9E manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., etc.), etc. Also, as polymerizable compounds, there can be cited diacrylic acid (2,2-dimethylethylene) (5-ethyl-1,3-dimethoxy-2,5-diyl) methylene (KAYARAD R-604 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like.

作為聚合性化合物(尤其,乙烯性不飽和化合物),就轉印後的感光性層的顯影性優異的觀點而言,其中,包含酯鍵者亦較佳。 作為包含酯鍵之乙烯性不飽和化合物,只要為在分子內包含酯鍵者,則不受特別限制,但就本發明的效果更優異的觀點而言,具有四羥甲基甲烷結構或三羥甲基丙烷結構之乙烯不飽和化合物為較佳,四羥甲基甲烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷四(甲基)丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(甲基)丙烯酸酯或二(三羥甲基丙烷)四丙烯酸酯為更佳。 就賦予可靠性之觀點而言,作為乙烯性不飽和化合物,包含具有碳數6~20的脂肪族基之乙烯性不飽和化合物和上述具有四羥甲基甲烷結構或三羥甲基丙烷結構之乙烯不飽和化合物為較佳。 作為具有碳數6以上的脂肪族結構之乙烯性不飽和化合物,可舉出1,9-壬二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯、1,10-癸二醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯及三環癸烷二甲醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯。 As a polymerizable compound (particularly, an ethylenically unsaturated compound), from the viewpoint of excellent developability of the photosensitive layer after transfer, those containing an ester bond are also preferred. The ethylenically unsaturated compound containing an ester bond is not particularly limited as long as it contains an ester bond in the molecule. However, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent, compounds having a tetramethylolmethane structure or a trihydroxyl methane structure are not particularly limited. Ethylenically unsaturated compounds with a methylpropane structure are preferred, such as tetramethylolmethane tri(meth)acrylate, tetramethylolmethane tetra(meth)acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate. ester or di(trimethylolpropane)tetraacrylate is more preferred. From the viewpoint of providing reliability, the ethylenically unsaturated compound includes an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and the above-mentioned compound having a tetramethylolmethane structure or a trimethylolpropane structure. Ethylenically unsaturated compounds are preferred. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic structure having 6 or more carbon atoms include 1,9-nonanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di(meth)acrylate, and Tricyclodecane dimethanol di(meth)acrylate.

作為聚合性化合物的較佳態樣之一,可舉出具有脂肪族烴環結構之聚合性化合物(較佳為2官能乙烯性不飽和化合物)。 作為上述聚合性化合物,具有由2環以上的脂肪族烴環縮環而成之環結構(較佳為選自包括三環癸烷結構及三環癸烯結構之群組中之結構)之聚合性化合物為較佳,具有由2環以上的脂肪族烴環縮環而成之環結構之2官能乙烯性不飽和化合物為更佳,三環癸烷二甲醇二(甲基)丙烯酸酯為進一步較佳。 作為上述脂肪族烴環結構,環戊烷結構、環己烷結構、三環癸烷結構、三環癸烯結構、降莰烷結構或異硼烷結構為較佳。 One of the preferred aspects of the polymerizable compound is a polymerizable compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure (preferably a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound). The polymerizable compound has a ring structure (preferably a structure selected from the group consisting of a tricyclodecane structure and a tricyclodecene structure) formed by condensing two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings. Preferable compounds are bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds, and bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having a ring structure formed by contracting two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are more preferable, and tricyclodecane dimethanol di(meth)acrylate is further preferable. Better. As the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, a cyclopentane structure, a cyclohexane structure, a tricyclodecane structure, a tricyclodecene structure, a norbornane structure or an isoborane structure is preferred.

聚合性化合物的分子量為200~3,000以下為較佳,250~2,600為更佳,280~2,200為進一步較佳,300~2,200為特佳。The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, further preferably 280 to 2,200, and particularly preferably 300 to 2,200.

又,作為感光性層的較佳態樣之一,感光性層包含式(M)所表示之化合物和具有酸基之乙烯性不飽和化合物為較佳,包含1,9-壬二醇二丙烯酸酯和具有羧酸基之多官能乙烯性不飽和化合物為更佳。In one preferred embodiment of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer preferably contains a compound represented by formula (M) and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and more preferably contains 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate and a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group.

又,作為感光性層的較佳態樣之一,就顯影殘渣抑制性及防鏽性的觀點而言,感光性層包含2官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物(較佳為2官能的(甲基)丙烯酸酯化合物)和3官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物(較佳為3官能以上的(甲基)丙烯酸酯化合物)為較佳。 2官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物與3官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物的含量的質量比(2官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物的質量/3官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物的質量)為10/90~90/10為較佳,30/70~70/30為更佳。 相對於所有乙烯性不飽和化合物的合計量,2官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物的含量為20.0質量%以上為較佳,30.0質量%以上為更佳,40.0質量%以上為進一步較佳。上限不受特別限制,例如為100質量%以下,90.0質量%以下為較佳,80.0質量%以下為更佳。 感光性層中的2官能的乙烯性不飽和化合物為5.0~60.0質量%為較佳,5.0~40.0質量%為更佳,5.0~40.0質量%為進一步較佳。 Furthermore, as one of the preferred aspects of the photosensitive layer, the photosensitive layer contains a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound (preferably a bifunctional (methyl ) acrylate compound) and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound (preferably a trifunctional or higher (meth)acrylate compound) are preferred. The mass ratio of the content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound to the content of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound (mass of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound/mass of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound) is 10/ 90~90/10 is better, 30/70~70/30 is better. The content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 20.0 mass% or more, more preferably 30.0 mass% or more, and still more preferably 40.0 mass% or more relative to the total amount of all ethylenically unsaturated compounds. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, it is 100 mass% or less, preferably 90.0 mass% or less, and more preferably 80.0 mass% or less. The bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the photosensitive layer is preferably 5.0 to 60.0 mass%, more preferably 5.0 to 40.0 mass%, and still more preferably 5.0 to 40.0 mass%.

感光性層可以包含單官能乙烯性不飽和化合物作為乙烯性不飽和化合物。 相對於感光性層中包含之所有乙烯性不飽和化合物的總含量,2官能以上的乙烯性不飽和化合物的含量為50~100質量%為較佳。 The photosensitive layer may contain a monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound as the ethylenically unsaturated compound. The content of the difunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 50 to 100% by mass relative to the total content of all ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the photosensitive layer.

聚合性化合物(尤其,乙烯性不飽和化合物)可以單獨使用1種,亦可以併用2種以上。 作為感光性層中的聚合性化合物(尤其,乙烯性不飽和化合物)的含量的下限值,相對於感光性層的總質量為10.0質量%以上為較佳,15.0質量%以上為更佳。又,作為上限值,70.0質量%以下為較佳,60.0質量%以下為更佳,50.0質量%以下為進一步較佳,40.0質量%以下為特佳。 A polymerizable compound (especially an ethylenically unsaturated compound) may be used individually by 1 type, or may be used in combination of 2 or more types. The lower limit of the content of the polymerizable compound (especially the ethylenically unsaturated compound) in the photosensitive layer is preferably 10.0 mass% or more, and more preferably 15.0 mass% or more based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Moreover, as an upper limit value, 70.0 mass % or less is preferable, 60.0 mass % or less is more preferable, 50.0 mass % or less is still more preferable, and 40.0 mass % or less is especially preferable.

-光聚合起始劑- 感光性層包含光聚合起始劑為較佳。 作為光聚合起始劑沒有特別限制,能夠使用公知的光聚合起始劑。 作為光聚合起始劑,可舉出具有肟酯結構之光聚合起始劑(以下,亦稱為“肟系光聚合起始劑”。)、具有α-胺基烷基苯酚結構之光聚合起始劑(以下,亦稱為“α-胺基烷基苯酚系光聚合起始劑”。)、具有α-羥基烷基苯酚結構之光聚合起始劑(以下,亦稱為“α-羥基烷基苯酚系聚合起始劑”。)、具有醯基氧化膦結構之光聚合起始劑(以下,亦稱為“醯基氧化膦系光聚合起始劑”。)及具有N-苯甘胺酸結構之光聚合起始劑(以下,亦稱為“N-苯甘胺酸系光聚合起始劑”。)等。 -Photopolymerization initiator- The photosensitive layer preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and known photopolymerization initiators can be used. Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure (hereinafter also referred to as an “oxime-based photopolymerization initiator”), and a photopolymerization initiator having an α-aminoalkylphenol structure. Initiator (hereinafter, also referred to as "α-aminoalkylphenol photopolymerization initiator"), photopolymerization initiator having an α-hydroxyalkylphenol structure (hereinafter, also referred to as "α- Hydroxyalkylphenol-based polymerization initiator".), photopolymerization initiator having a acylphosphine oxide structure (hereinafter, also referred to as "hydroxyalkylphosphine oxide-based photopolymerization initiator.") and N-benzene Photopolymerization initiator with glycine structure (hereinafter also referred to as "N-phenylglycine-based photopolymerization initiator"), etc.

光聚合起始劑包含選自包括肟系光聚合起始劑、α-胺基烷基苯酚系光聚合起始劑、α-羥基烷基苯酚系聚合起始劑及N-苯甘胺酸系光聚合起始劑之群組中之至少1種為較佳,包含選自包括肟系光聚合起始劑、α-胺基烷基苯酚系光聚合起始劑及N-苯甘胺酸系光聚合起始劑之群組中之至少1種為更佳。The photopolymerization initiator includes an oxime-based photopolymerization initiator, an α-aminoalkylphenol-based photopolymerization initiator, an α-hydroxyalkylphenol-based polymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine-based photopolymerization initiator. At least one type of photopolymerization initiator is preferably selected from the group consisting of oxime-based photopolymerization initiators, α-aminoalkylphenol-based photopolymerization initiators, and N-phenylglycine-based photopolymerization initiators. More preferably, it is at least one kind from the group of photopolymerization initiators.

又,作為光聚合起始劑,例如,還可以使用日本特開2011-095716號公報的[0031]~[0042]段及日本特開2015-014783號公報的[0064]~[0081]段中記載之聚合起始劑。Furthermore, as the photopolymerization initiator, for example, the polymerization initiators described in paragraphs [0031] to [0042] of JP-A-2011-095716 and paragraphs [0064] to [0081] of JP-A-2015-014783 can also be used.

又,就感光性、曝光部及非曝光部的可見性以及解析性的觀點而言,光聚合起始劑包含選自包括2,4,5-三芳基咪唑二聚物及其衍生物之群組中之至少1種作為光自由基聚合起始劑為較佳。另外,2,4,5-三芳基咪唑二聚體及其衍生物中的2個2,4,5-三芳基咪唑結構可以相同,亦可以不同。 作為2,4,5-三芳基咪唑二聚物的衍生物,例如可舉出2-(鄰氯苯基)-4,5-二苯基咪唑二聚物、2-(鄰氯苯基)-4,5-二(甲氧基苯基)咪唑二聚物、2-(鄰氟苯基)-4,5-二苯基咪唑二聚物、2-(鄰甲氧基苯基)-4,5-二苯基咪唑二聚物及2-(對甲氧基苯基)-4,5-二苯基咪唑二聚物。 作為2,4,5-三芳基咪唑二聚體的衍生物,例如還可舉出2,2’-雙(2-氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基-1,2’-聯咪唑。 In addition, from the viewpoint of photosensitivity, visibility of the exposed part and the non-exposed part, and resolution, the photopolymerization initiator contains a compound selected from the group consisting of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and its derivatives. At least one of the group is preferably used as a photoradical polymerization initiator. In addition, the two 2,4,5-triarylimidazole structures in the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and its derivatives may be the same or different. Examples of derivatives of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer include 2-(o-chlorophenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer and 2-(o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-bis(methoxyphenyl)imidazole dimer, 2-(o-fluorophenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2-(o-methoxyphenyl)- 4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer and 2-(p-methoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer. Examples of derivatives of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer include 2,2'-bis(2-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenyl- 1,2'-biimidazole.

作為光自由基聚合起始劑,例如可舉出二甲基胺基苯甲酸乙酯(DBE,CAS No.10287-53-3)、安息香甲醚、(p,p’-二甲氧基苄基)大茴香酯、TAZ-110(商品名:Midori Kagaku Co.,Ltd.製造)、二苯甲酮、4,4’-雙(二乙基胺基)二苯甲酮、TAZ-111(商品名:Midori Kagaku Co.,Ltd.製造)、Irgacure OXE01、OXE02、OXE03、OXE04(BASF公司製造)、Omnirad651及369(商品名:IGM Resins B.V.公司製造)及2,2’-雙(2-氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基-1,2’-聯咪唑(Tokyo Chemical Industry Co.,Ltd.製造)。Examples of photoradical polymerization initiators include dimethylaminobenzoic acid ethyl ester (DBE, CAS No. 10287-53-3), benzoin methyl ether, (p,p'-dimethoxybenzyl base) anisyl ester, TAZ-110 (trade name: manufactured by Midori Kagaku Co., Ltd.), benzophenone, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, TAZ-111 ( Trade name: Midori Kagaku Co., Ltd.), Irgacure OXE01, OXE02, OXE03, OXE04 (BASF company), Omnirad651 and 369 (trade name: IGM Resins B.V. company) and 2,2'-double (2- Chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'-biimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).

作為光自由基聚合起始劑的市售品,例如可以舉出1-[4-(苯硫基)苯基]-1,2-辛二酮-2-(O-苯甲醯肟)(商品名:IRGACURE(註冊商標) OXE-01,BASF公司製造)、1-[9-乙基-6-(2-甲基苯甲醯基)-9H-咔唑-3-基]乙酮-1-(O-乙醯肟)(商品名:IRGACURE OXE-02,BASF公司製造)、IRGACURE OXE-03(BASF公司製造)、IRGACURE OXE-04(BASF公司製造)、2-(二甲基胺基)-2-[(4-甲基苯基)甲基]-1-[4-(4-口末啉基)苯基]-1-丁酮(商品名:Omnirad379EG,IGM Resins B.V.製造)、2-甲基-1-(4-甲硫基苯基)-2-口末啉基丙-1-酮(商品名:Omnirad907,IGM Resins B.V.製造)、2-羥基-1-{4-[4-(2-羥基-2-甲基丙醯基)苄基]苯基}-2-甲基丙-1-酮(商品名:Omnirad127,IGM Resins B.V.製造)、2-苄基-2-二甲基胺基-1-(4-口末啉基苯基)丁酮-1(商品名:Omnirad369,IGM Resins B.V.製造)、2-羥基-2-甲基-1-苯基丙-1-酮(商品名:Omnirad1173,IGM Resins B.V.製造)、1-羥基環己基苯基酮(商品名:Omnirad184,IGM Resins B.V.製造)、2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯基乙烷-1-酮(商品名:Omnirad651,IGM Resins B.V.製造)、2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基-二苯基氧化膦(商品名:Omnirad TPO H,IGM Resins B.V.製造)、雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)苯基氧化膦(商品名:Omnirad819,IGM Resins B.V.製造)、肟酯系的光聚合起始劑(商品名:Lunar6,DKSH Japan K.K.製造)、2,2’-雙(2-氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基聯咪唑(2-(2-氯苯基)-4,5-二苯基咪唑二聚物)(商品名:B-CIM,Hampford公司製造)及2-(鄰氯苯基)-4,5-二苯基咪唑二聚物(商品名:BCTB,Tokyo Chemical Industry Co.,Ltd.製造)、1-[4-(苯硫基)苯基]-3-環戊基丙烷-1,2-二酮-2-(O-苯甲醯肟)(商品名:TR-PBG-305,Changzhou Tronly New Electronic Materials CO.,LTD.製造)、1,2-丙烷二酮,3-環己基-1-[9-乙基-6-(2-呋喃基羰基)-9H-咔唑-3-基]-,2-(O-乙醯肟)(商品名:TR-PBG-326,Changzhou Tronly New Electronic Materials CO.,LTD.製造)及3-環己基-1-(6-(2-(苯甲醯氧基亞胺基)辛醯基)-9-乙基-9H-咔唑-3-基)-丙烷-1,2-二酮-2-(O-苯甲醯肟)(商品名:TR-PBG-391,Changzhou Tronly New Electronic Materials CO.,LTD.製造)。 又,作為光自由基聚合起始劑的市售品,可舉出產品名稱“Omnirad 379”(IGM Resins B.V.製造)的烷基苯酮系化合物。 Examples of commercially available photoradical polymerization initiators include 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-1,2-octanedione-2-(O-benzyl oxime) ( Trade name: IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-01, manufactured by BASF Corporation), 1-[9-ethyl-6-(2-methylbenzoyl)-9H-carbazol-3-yl]ethanone- 1-(O-acetyl oxime) (trade name: IRGACURE OXE-02, manufactured by BASF), IRGACURE OXE-03 (manufactured by BASF), IRGACURE OXE-04 (manufactured by BASF), 2-(dimethylamine base)-2-[(4-methylphenyl)methyl]-1-[4-(4-ethylphenyl)phenyl]-1-butanone (trade name: Omnirad379EG, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.) , 2-methyl-1-(4-methylthiophenyl)-2-ethylpropanyl-1-one (trade name: Omnirad907, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2-hydroxy-1-{4- [4-(2-Hydroxy-2-methylpropyl)benzyl]phenyl}-2-methylpropan-1-one (trade name: Omnirad127, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2-benzyl-2 -Dimethylamino-1-(4-ortholinylphenyl)butanone-1 (trade name: Omnirad369, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenylpropan- 1-Ketone (trade name: Omnirad1173, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone (trade name: Omnirad184, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenyl Ethane-1-one (trade name: Omnirad 651, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl-diphenylphosphine oxide (trade name: Omnirad TPO H, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.) ), bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl)phenylphosphine oxide (trade name: Omnirad819, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), oxime ester-based photopolymerization initiator (trade name: Lunar6, DKSH Manufactured by Japan K.K.), 2,2'-bis(2-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole (2-(2-chlorophenyl)-4,5-bis Phenylimidazole dimer) (trade name: B-CIM, manufactured by Hampford Co., Ltd.) and 2-(o-chlorophenyl)-4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer (trade name: BCTB, Tokyo Chemical Industry Co. ., Ltd.), 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclopentylpropane-1,2-dione-2-(O-benzyl oxime) (trade name: TR -PBG-305, manufactured by Changzhou Tronly New Electronic Materials CO., LTD.), 1,2-propanedione, 3-cyclohexyl-1-[9-ethyl-6-(2-furylcarbonyl)-9H -Carbazol-3-yl]-,2-(O-acetyl oxime) (trade name: TR-PBG-326, manufactured by Changzhou Trolly New Electronic Materials CO., LTD.) and 3-cyclohexyl-1-( 6-(2-(Benzyloxyimino)octyl)-9-ethyl-9H-carbazol-3-yl)-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-benzoyl) Oxime) (trade name: TR-PBG-391, manufactured by Changzhou Trolly New Electronic Materials CO., LTD.). Examples of commercially available photoradical polymerization initiators include an alkylphenone-based compound with the product name “Omnirad 379” (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.).

光聚合起始劑可以單獨使用1種,亦可以使用2種以上。 在併用2種以上之情況下,使用肟系光聚合起始劑及選自α-胺基烷基苯酮系光聚合起始劑及α-羥基烷基苯酮系聚合起始劑中之至少1種為較佳。 在感光性層包含光聚合起始劑之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,光聚合起始劑的含量為0.01質量%以上為較佳,0.1質量%以上為更佳,0.5質量%以上為進一步較佳。又,作為其上限值,相對於感光性層的總質量為10.0質量%以下為較佳,7.0質量%以下為更佳。 One type of photopolymerization initiator may be used alone, or two or more types may be used. When two or more types are used in combination, at least one selected from the group consisting of an oxime-based photopolymerization initiator and an α-aminoalkylphenone-based photopolymerization initiator and an α-hydroxyalkylphenone-based polymerization initiator is used. 1 type is better. When the photosensitive layer contains a photopolymerization initiator, the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, more preferably 0.1% by mass or more, and 0.5% by mass relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. The above is further preferred. Moreover, the upper limit is preferably 10.0 mass% or less, and more preferably 7.0 mass% or less based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer.

-雜環化合物- 感光性層可以包含雜環化合物。 雜環化合物所具有之雜環可以為單環及多環中的任意雜環。 作為雜環化合物所具有之雜原子,可舉出氮原子、氧原子及硫原子。雜環化合物具有選自包括氮原子、氧原子及硫原子之組群中之至少1種的原子為較佳,具有氮原子為更佳。 -Heterocyclic compound- The photosensitive layer may contain a heterocyclic compound. The heterocyclic compound may be a monocyclic or polycyclic heterocyclic compound. As heteroatoms of the heterocyclic compound, nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms and sulfur atoms can be cited. It is preferred that the heterocyclic compound has at least one atom selected from the group consisting of nitrogen atoms, oxygen atoms and sulfur atoms, and it is more preferred that the heterocyclic compound has a nitrogen atom.

作為雜環化合物,例如可舉出三唑化合物、苯并三唑化合物、四唑化合物、噻二唑化合物、三𠯤化合物、繞丹寧化合物、噻唑化合物、苯并噻唑化合物、苯并咪唑化合物、苯并㗁唑化合物及嘧啶化合物。 在上述之中,作為雜環化合物,選自包括三唑化合物、苯并三唑化合物、四唑化合物、噻二唑化合物、三𠯤化合物、繞丹寧化合物、噻唑化合物、苯并咪唑化合物及苯并㗁唑化合物之群組中之至少1種化合物為較佳,選自包括三唑化合物、苯并三唑化合物、四唑化合物、噻二唑化合物、噻唑化合物、苯并噻唑化合物、苯并咪唑化合物及苯并㗁唑化合物之群組中之至少1種化合物為更佳。 As heterocyclic compounds, for example, triazole compounds, benzotriazole compounds, tetrazole compounds, thiadiazole compounds, trioxane compounds, dioxane compounds, thiazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzimidazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds and pyrimidine compounds can be cited. Among the above, as the heterocyclic compound, at least one compound selected from the group including triazole compounds, benzotriazole compounds, tetrazole compounds, thiadiazole compounds, trioxane compounds, dioxane compounds, thiazole compounds, benzimidazole compounds and benzothiazole compounds is preferred, and at least one compound selected from the group including triazole compounds, benzotriazole compounds, tetrazole compounds, thiadiazole compounds, thiazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzimidazole compounds and benzothiazole compounds is more preferred.

以下示出雜環化合物的較佳具體例。作為三唑化合物及苯并三唑化合物,能夠例示以下化合物。Preferred specific examples of the heterocyclic compound are shown below. Examples of the triazole compound and the benzotriazole compound include the following compounds.

[化學式9] [Chemical formula 9]

[化學式10] [Chemical formula 10]

作為四唑化合物,能夠例示以下化合物。As the tetrazole compound, the following compounds can be exemplified.

[化學式11] [Chemical formula 11]

[化學式12] [Chemical formula 12]

作為噻二唑化合物,能夠例示以下化合物。Examples of the thiadiazole compound include the following compounds.

[化學式13] [Chemical formula 13]

作為三𠯤化合物,能夠例示以下化合物。Examples of the trisulfide compounds include the following compounds.

[化學式14] [Chemical formula 14]

作為繞丹寧化合物,能夠例示以下化合物。As the diotanine compound, the following compounds can be exemplified.

[化學式15] [Chemical formula 15]

作為噻唑化合物,能夠例示以下化合物。Examples of the thiazole compound include the following compounds.

[化學式16] [Chemical formula 16]

作為苯并噻唑化合物,能夠例示以下化合物。As the benzothiazole compound, the following compounds can be exemplified.

[化學式17] [Chemical formula 17]

作為苯并咪唑化合物,能夠例示以下化合物。Examples of the benzimidazole compound include the following compounds.

[化學式18] [Chemical formula 18]

[化學式19] [Chemical formula 19]

作為苯并㗁唑化合物,能夠例示以下化合物。As benzoethazole compounds, the following compounds can be exemplified.

[化學式20] [Chemical formula 20]

雜環化合物可以單獨使用1種,亦可以併用2種以上。 在感光性層包含雜環化合物之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,雜環化合物的含量為0.01~20.0質量%為較佳,0.10~10.0質量%為更佳,0.30~8.0質量%為進一步較佳,0.50~5.0質量%為特佳。 The heterocyclic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When the photosensitive layer contains the heterocyclic compound, the content of the heterocyclic compound is preferably 0.01 to 20.0 mass %, more preferably 0.10 to 10.0 mass %, further preferably 0.30 to 8.0 mass %, and particularly preferably 0.50 to 5.0 mass % relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.

-脂肪族硫醇化合物- 感光性層可以包含脂肪族硫醇化合物。 藉由感光性層包含脂肪族硫醇化合物而脂肪族硫醇化合物與具有乙烯性不飽和基之自由基聚合性化合物之間進行烯-硫醇反應,從而所形成之膜的硬化收縮得到抑制,並且應力得到緩和。 -Aliphatic thiol compound- The photosensitive layer may contain an aliphatic thiol compound. By containing the aliphatic thiol compound in the photosensitive layer, an ene-thiol reaction occurs between the aliphatic thiol compound and the radical polymerizable compound having an ethylenic unsaturated group, thereby suppressing the hardening and shrinkage of the formed film and alleviating the stress.

作為脂肪族硫醇化合物,單官能的脂肪族硫醇化合物或多官能脂肪族硫醇化合物(亦即,2官能以上的脂肪族硫醇化合物)為較佳。As the aliphatic thiol compound, a monofunctional aliphatic thiol compound or a polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound (that is, a bifunctional or higher aliphatic thiol compound) is preferred.

在上述之中,作為脂肪族硫醇化合物,就所形成之圖案的密接性(尤其,曝光後的密接性)的觀點而言,多官能的脂肪族硫醇化合物為較佳。Among the above, as the aliphatic thiol compound, a polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the adhesion of the formed pattern (especially the adhesion after exposure).

在本說明書中,“多官能的脂肪族硫醇化合物”係指在分子內具有2個以上硫醇基(亦稱為“巰基”。)之脂肪族化合物。In the present specification, a "polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound" refers to an aliphatic compound having two or more thiol groups (also referred to as "thiol groups") in a molecule.

作為多官能的脂肪族硫醇化合物,分子量為100以上的低分子化合物為較佳。具體而言,多官能的脂肪族硫醇化合物的分子量為100~1,500為更佳,150~1,000為進一步較佳。The polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is preferably a low molecular weight compound having a molecular weight of 100 or more. Specifically, the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound has a molecular weight of 100 to 1,500, more preferably 150 to 1,000.

作為多官能的脂肪族硫醇化合物的官能基數,例如就所形成之圖案的密接性的觀點而言,2~10官能為較佳,2~8官能為更佳,2~6官能為進一步較佳。As for the number of functional groups of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound, for example, from the viewpoint of the adhesion of the formed pattern, 2 to 10 functional groups are preferred, 2 to 8 functional groups are more preferred, and 2 to 6 functional groups are further preferred. good.

作為多官能的脂肪族硫醇化合物,例如可舉出三羥甲基丙烷三(3-巰基丁酸酯)、1,4-雙(3-巰基丁醯氧基)丁烷、新戊四醇四(3-巰基丁酸酯)、1,3,5-三(3-巰基丁醯氧基乙基)-1,3,5-三𠯤-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-三酮、1,3,5-三(2-(3-硫基丁醯氧基)乙基)-1,3,5-三嗪烷-2,4,6-三酮、三羥甲基乙烷三(3-巰基丁酸酯)、三[(3-巰基丙醯基氧基)乙基]異氰脲酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三(3-巰基丙酸酯)、新戊四醇四(3-巰基丙酸酯)、四乙二醇雙(3-巰基丙酸酯)、二新戊四醇六(3-巰基丙酸酯)、乙二醇雙硫基丙酸酯、1,4-雙(3-巰基丁醯氧基)丁烷、1,2-乙二硫醇、1,3-丙二硫醇、1,6-六亞甲基二硫醇、2,2’-(亞乙基二硫代)二乙硫醇、meso-2,3-二巰基丁二酸及二(巰基乙基)醚。Examples of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound include trihydroxymethylpropane tris(3-butylbutyrate), 1,4-bis(3-butylbutyryloxy)butane, pentaerythritol tetra(3-butylbutyrate), 1,3,5-tris(3-butylbutyryloxyethyl)-1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-trione, 1,3,5-tris(2-(3-thiobutylbutyryloxy)ethyl)-1,3,5-triazinane-2,4,6-trione, trihydroxymethylethane tris(3-butylbutyrate), tris[(3 [-(3-butylpropionyloxy)ethyl] isocyanurate, trihydroxymethylpropane tris(3-butylpropionate), pentaerythritol tetra(3-butylpropionate), tetraethylene glycol bis(3-butylpropionate), dipentaerythritol hexa(3-butylpropionate), ethylene glycol bis(thio)propionate, 1,4-bis(3-butylbutyryloxy)butane, 1,2-ethanedithiol, 1,3-propanedithiol, 1,6-hexamethylenedithiol, 2,2'-(ethylenedithio)diethanethiol, meso-2,3-dibutylsuccinic acid and di(butylethyl) ether.

在上述之中,作為多官能的脂肪族硫醇化合物,選自包括三羥甲基丙烷三(3-巰基丁酸酯)、1,4-雙(3-巰基丁醯氧基)丁烷及1,3,5-三(3-巰基丁醯氧基乙基)-1,3,5-三𠯤-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-三酮之群組中之至少1種化合物為較佳。Among the above, the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is selected from the group consisting of trimethylolpropane tris(3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis(3-mercaptobutyloxy)butane and At least 1 of the group of 1,3,5-tris(3-mercaptobutyloxyethyl)-1,3,5-tris-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-trione compounds are preferred.

作為單官能的脂肪族硫醇化合物,例如可舉出1-辛硫醇、1-十二烷硫醇、β-巰基丙酸、3-巰基丙酸甲酯、2-乙基己基-3-巰基丙酸酯、正辛基-3-巰基丙酸酯、3-巰基丙酸甲氧基丁酯及3-巰基丙酸硬脂酯。Examples of the monofunctional aliphatic thiol compound include 1-octanethiol, 1-dodecanethiol, β-butylpropionic acid, methyl 3-butylpropionate, 2-ethylhexyl-3-butylpropionate, n-octyl-3-butylpropionate, methoxybutyl 3-butylpropionate, and stearyl 3-butylpropionate.

感光性層可以包含單獨1種脂肪族硫醇化合物,亦可以包含2種以上的脂肪族硫醇化合物。The photosensitive layer may contain one kind of aliphatic thiol compound alone, or may contain two or more kinds of aliphatic thiol compounds.

在感光性層包含脂肪族硫醇化合物之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,脂肪族硫醇化合物的含量為5質量%以上為較佳,5~50質量%為更佳,5~30質量%為進一步較佳,8~20質量%為特佳。When the photosensitive layer contains an aliphatic thiol compound, the content of the aliphatic thiol compound is preferably 5 mass % or more, more preferably 5 to 50 mass %, and 5 to 5 mass % relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. 30% by mass is more preferred, and 8 to 20% by mass is particularly preferred.

-熱交聯性化合物- 就所得到之硬化膜的強度及所得到之未硬化膜的黏著性的觀點而言,感光性層包含熱交聯性化合物亦較佳。另外,在本說明書中,後述之具有乙烯性不飽和基之熱交聯性化合物不作為乙烯性不飽和化合物進行處理,而是作為熱交聯性化合物進行處理。 作為熱交聯性化合物,可舉出環氧化合物、氧環丁烷化合物、羥甲基化合物及封端異氰酸酯化合物。其中,就所得到之硬化膜的強度及所得到之未硬化膜的黏結性的觀點而言,封端異氰酸酯化合物為較佳。 封端異氰酸酯化合物與羥基及羧基進行反應,因此例如在鹼溶性樹脂及具有乙烯性不飽和基之自由基聚合性化合物中的至少一者具有羥基及羧基中的至少一者之情況下,具有所形成之膜的親水性下降、作為保護膜的功能增強之傾向。 另外,封端異氰酸酯化合物係指“具有藉由封端劑保護(所謂的遮罩)異氰酸酯的異氰酸酯基之結構之化合物”。 -Thermal cross-linkable compound- It is also preferable that the photosensitive layer contains a thermally crosslinkable compound from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. In addition, in this specification, the thermally crosslinkable compound which has an ethylenically unsaturated group mentioned later is not treated as an ethylenically unsaturated compound, but is treated as a thermally crosslinkable compound. Examples of thermally crosslinkable compounds include epoxy compounds, oxybutane compounds, methylol compounds, and blocked isocyanate compounds. Among these, a blocked isocyanate compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. The blocked isocyanate compound reacts with a hydroxyl group and a carboxyl group, and therefore, for example, when at least one of an alkali-soluble resin and a radically polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group has at least one of a hydroxyl group and a carboxyl group, it has the The hydrophilicity of the formed film tends to decrease and its function as a protective film tends to increase. In addition, the blocked isocyanate compound refers to "a compound having a structure in which the isocyanate group of the isocyanate is protected (so-called masked) by a blocking agent."

封端異氰酸酯化合物的解離溫度不受特別限制,但100~160℃為較佳,130~150℃為更佳。 封端異氰酸酯的解離溫度係指“使用示差掃描熱量儀並藉由DSC(Differential scanning calorimetry:示差掃描熱量法)分析而測量時的伴隨封端異氰酸酯的脫保護反應之吸熱峰的溫度”。 作為示差掃描熱量儀,例如,能夠較佳地使用Seiko Instruments Inc.製造的示差掃描熱量儀(型號:DSC6200)。然而,示差掃描熱量儀並不限定於此。 The dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 to 160°C, and more preferably 130 to 150°C. The dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate refers to "the temperature of the endothermic peak accompanying the deprotection reaction of the blocked isocyanate when measured by DSC (Differential scanning calorimetry) analysis using a differential scanning calorimeter." As a differential scanning calorimeter, for example, a differential scanning calorimeter (model: DSC6200) manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc. can be preferably used. However, the differential scanning calorimeter is not limited thereto.

作為解離溫度為100~160℃的封端劑,可舉出活性亞甲基化合物〔丙二酸二酯(丙二酸二甲酯、丙二酸二乙酯、丙二酸二正丁酯、丙二酸二2-乙基己酯等)〕、肟化合物(甲醛肟、乙醛肟、丙酮肟、甲基乙基酮肟及環己酮肟等在分子內具有-C(=N-OH)-所表示之結構之化合物)。 在該等之中,作為解離溫度為100~160℃的封端劑,例如就保存穩定性的觀點而言,選自肟化合物中之至少1種為較佳。 Examples of end-capping agents having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160° C. include active methylene compounds [malonate diesters (dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, di-n-butyl malonate, Di2-ethylhexyl malonate, etc.), oxime compounds (formaldehyde oxime, acetaldehyde oxime, acetone oxime, methyl ethyl ketone oxime and cyclohexanone oxime, etc. have -C (=N-OH) in the molecule )-the compound of the structure represented). Among these, as a terminal blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160° C., for example, from the viewpoint of storage stability, at least one type selected from oxime compounds is preferred.

例如,就改善膜的脆性、提高與被轉印體的密接力等觀點而言,封端異氰酸酯化合物具有異氰脲酸酯結構為較佳。 例如,對六亞甲基二異氰酸酯進行三聚異氰酸酯化來保護,藉此獲得具有三聚異氰酸酯結構之封端異氰酸酯化合物。 在具有異氰脲酸酯結構之封端異氰酸酯化合物之中,就與不具有肟結構之化合物相比,更容易將解離溫度設在較佳的範圍內,且容易減少顯影殘渣之觀點而言,具有將肟化合物用作封端劑之肟結構之化合物為較佳。 For example, from the viewpoint of improving the brittleness of the film and improving the adhesion to the transfer body, the blocked isocyanate compound preferably has an isocyanurate structure. For example, hexamethylene diisocyanate is protected by isocyanuration to obtain a blocked isocyanate compound having an isocyanurate structure. Among the blocked isocyanurate compounds having an isocyanurate structure, compared with compounds without an oxime structure, it is easier to set the decomposition temperature within a better range and to reduce the development residue. The compound having an oxime structure using an oxime compound as a blocking agent is preferred.

封端異氰酸酯化合物可以具有聚合性基。 作為聚合性基,沒有特別限制,能夠使用公知的聚合性基,自由基聚合性基為較佳。 作為聚合性基,可舉出(甲基)丙烯醯氧基、(甲基)丙烯醯胺基及苯乙烯基等乙烯性不飽和基以及環氧丙基等具有環氧基之基。 其中,作為聚合性基,乙烯性不飽和基為較佳,(甲基)丙烯醯氧基為更佳,丙烯醯氧基為進一步較佳。 The blocked isocyanate compound may have a polymerizable group. The polymerizable group is not particularly limited, and known polymerizable groups can be used, with radical polymerizable groups being preferred. Examples of the polymerizable group include ethylenically unsaturated groups such as a (meth)acryloxy group, a (meth)acrylamide group, and a styrene group, and groups having an epoxy group such as a glycidyl group. Among them, as the polymerizable group, an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferred, a (meth)acryloxy group is more preferred, and an acryloxy group is further preferred.

作為封端異氰酸酯化合物,能夠使用市售品。 作為封端異氰酸酯化合物的市售品的例子,可舉出Karenz(註冊商標)AOI-BM、Karenz(註冊商標)MOI-BM、Karenz(註冊商標)MOI-BP等(以上為SHOWA DENKO K.K.製造)、封端型的Duranate系列(例如,Duranate(註冊商標)TPA-B80E、Duranate(註冊商標)WT32-B75P等,Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation製造)。 As the blocked isocyanate compound, commercially available products can be used. Examples of commercially available blocked isocyanate compounds include Karenz (registered trademark) AOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BP, etc. (the above are manufactured by SHOWA DENKO K.K.) , End-capped Duranate series (for example, Duranate (registered trademark) TPA-B80E, Duranate (registered trademark) WT32-B75P, etc., manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Corporation).

熱交聯性化合物可以單獨使用1種,亦可以併用2種以上。 在感光性層包含熱交聯性化合物之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,熱交聯性化合物的含量為1.0~50.0質量%為較佳,5.0~30.0質量%為更佳,5.0~25.0質量%為進一步較佳。 One type of thermally crosslinkable compound may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination. When the photosensitive layer contains a thermal cross-linkable compound, the content of the thermal cross-linkable compound is preferably 1.0 to 50.0 mass %, more preferably 5.0 to 30.0 mass %, and 5.0 mass % relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. ~25.0% by mass is further more preferable.

-界面活性劑- 感光性層可以包含界面活性劑。 作為界面活性劑,可舉出例如在日本專利第4502784號公報的[0017]段及日本特開2009-237362號公報的[0060]~[0071]段中記載之界面活性劑。 -Surfactant- The photosensitive layer may contain a surfactant. Examples of the surfactant include surfactants described in paragraph [0017] of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs [0060] to [0071] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-237362.

作為界面活性劑,氟系界面活性劑或矽酮系界面活性劑為較佳。 作為氟系界面活性劑的市售品,例如可舉出MEGAFACE F-171、F-172、F-173、F-176、F-177、F-141、F-142、F-143、F-144、F-437、F-475、F-477、F-479、F-482、F-551-A、F-552、F-554、F-555-A、F-556、F-557、F-558、F-559、F-560、F-561、F-565、F-563、F-568、F-575、F-780、EXP、MFS-330、R-41、R-41-LM、R-01、R-40、R-40-LM、RS-43、TF-1956、RS-90、R-94、RS-72-K、DS-21(以上為DIC Corporation製造)、FLUORAD FC430、FC431、FC171(以上為Sumitomo 3M Limited製造)、Surflon S-382、SC-101、SC-103、SC-104、SC-105、SC-1068、SC-381、SC-383、S-393、KH-40(以上為AGC Inc.製造)、PolyFox PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(以上為OMNOVA Solutions Inc.製造)、Footgent 710FM、710FL、610FM、601AD、601ADH2、602A、215M、245F、251、212M、250、209F、222F、208G、710LA、710FS、730LM、650AC、681(以上為NEOS COMPANY LIMITED製造)等。 又,氟系界面活性劑亦能夠較佳地使用丙烯酸系化合物,該丙烯酸系化合物為具有包含含有氟原子之官能基之分子結構,且施加熱時含有氟原子之官能基部分被切斷,從而氟原子揮發。作為該種氟系界面活性劑,可舉出DIC Corporation製造的MEGAFACE DS系列(The Chemical Daily(2016年2月22日)、NIKKEI BUSINESS DAILY(2016年2月23日)),例如MEGAFACE DS-21。 又,作為氟系界面活性劑,使用具有氟化烷基或氟化伸烷基醚基之含氟原子之乙烯醚化合物與親水性乙烯醚化合物的聚合物亦較佳。 又,作為氟系界面活性劑,亦能夠使用封端聚合物。 又,作為氟系界面活性劑,亦能夠較佳地使用含氟高分子化合物,該含氟高分子化合物包含來自於具有氟原子之(甲基)丙烯酸酯化合物之構成單元和來自於具有2個以上(較佳為5個以上)伸烷氧基(較佳為伸乙氧基、伸丙氧基)之(甲基)丙烯酸酯化合物之構成單元。 又,作為氟系界面活性劑,亦能夠使用在側鏈中具有含有乙烯性不飽和鍵之基之含氟聚合物。可舉出MEGAFACE RS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K(以上,DIC Corporation製造)等。 作為氟系界面活性劑,就提高環境適性之觀點而言,來自於全氟辛烷酸(PFOA)及全氟辛烷磺酸(PFOS)等具有碳數為7以上的全氟烷基之化合物的代替材料之界面活性劑為較佳。 作為非離子系界面活性劑,可舉出甘油、三羥甲基丙烷、三羥甲基乙烷以及它們的乙氧基化物及丙氧基化物(例如,甘油丙氧基化物、甘油乙氧基化物等)、聚氧乙烯月桂基醚、聚氧乙烯硬脂基醚、聚氧乙烯油基醚、聚氧乙烯辛基苯基醚、聚氧乙烯壬基苯基醚、聚乙二醇二月桂酸酯、聚乙二醇二硬脂酸酯、脫水山梨糖醇脂肪酸酯、Pluronic(註冊商標)L10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2(以上為BASF公司製造)、Tetronic 304、701、704、901、904、150R1(以上為BASF公司製造)、Solsperse 20000(以上為Lubrizol Japan Limited.製造)、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002(以上為FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation製造)、PIONIN D-6112、D-6112-W、D-6315(以上為Takemoto Oil & Fat Co.,Ltd.製造)、Olfine E1010、Surfynol 104、400、440(以上為Nissin Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造)等。 As the surfactant, a fluorine-based surfactant or a silicone-based surfactant is preferred. Commercially available products of fluorine-based surfactants include, for example, MEGAFACE F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, F-144, F-437, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-551-A, F-552, F-554, F-555-A, F-556, F-557, F-558, F-5 59, F-560, F-561, F-565, F-563, F-568, F-575, F-780, EXP, MFS-330, R-41, R-41-LM, R-01, R-40, R-40-LM, RS-43, TF-1956, RS-90, R-94, RS-72-K, DS-21 (all DIC Corporation), FLUORAD FC430, FC431, FC171 (all manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S-393, KH-40 (all manufactured by AGC Inc.), PolyFox PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (all manufactured by OMNOVA Solutions Inc.), Footgent 710FM, 710FL, 610FM, 601AD, 601ADH2, 602A, 215M, 245F, 251, 212M, 250, 209F, 222F, 208G, 710LA, 710FS, 730LM, 650AC, 681 (all manufactured by NEOS COMPANY LIMITED), etc. In addition, the fluorine-based surfactant can also preferably use an acrylic compound, which has a molecular structure containing a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and when heat is applied, the functional group containing a fluorine atom is partially cut off, thereby volatilizing the fluorine atom. As such fluorine-based surfactants, the MEGAFACE DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), NIKKEI BUSINESS DAILY (February 23, 2016)) can be cited, such as MEGAFACE DS-21. In addition, as a fluorine-based surfactant, it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound. In addition, as a fluorine-based surfactant, a capped polymer can also be used. Furthermore, as a fluorine-based surfactant, a fluorine-containing polymer compound can also be preferably used, which contains a constituent unit from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and a constituent unit from a (meth)acrylate compound having two or more (preferably five or more) alkoxy groups (preferably ethoxy and propoxy groups). Furthermore, as a fluorine-based surfactant, a fluorine-containing polymer having a group containing an ethylenic unsaturated bond in the side chain can also be used. Examples include MEGAFACE RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, RS-72-K (all manufactured by DIC Corporation), etc. As fluorine-based surfactants, from the perspective of improving environmental suitability, surfactants derived from alternative materials of compounds having perfluoroalkyl groups with more than 7 carbon atoms, such as perfluorooctane acid (PFOA) and perfluorooctane sulfonic acid (PFOS), are preferred. As the nonionic surfactant, there can be mentioned glycerin, trihydroxymethylpropane, trihydroxymethylethane and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (e.g., glycerin propoxylate, glycerin ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic (registered trademark) L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2 (all manufactured by BASF), Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (all manufactured by BASF), Solsperse 20000 (all manufactured by Lubrizol Japan Limited.), NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 (all manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation), PIONIN D-6112, D-6112-W, D-6315 (all manufactured by Takemoto Oil & Fat Co., Ltd.), Olfine E1010, Surfynol 104, 400, 440 (all manufactured by Nissin Chemical Co., Ltd.), etc.

作為矽酮系界面活性劑,可舉出由矽氧烷鍵形成之直鏈狀聚合物及在側鏈或末端導入有機基之改質矽氧烷聚合物。As silicone-based surfactants, there are linear polymers formed by siloxane bonds and modified siloxane polymers with organic groups introduced into the side chains or ends.

作為界面活性劑的具體例,可舉出DOWSIL 8032 ADDITIVE、Toray Silicone DC3PA、Toray Silicone SH7PA、Toray Silicone DC11PA、Toray Silicone SH21PA、Toray Silicone SH28PA、Toray Silicone SH29PA、Toray Silicone SH30PA、Toray Silicone SH8400(以上為Dow Corning Toray Silicone Co.,Ltd.製造)以及X-22-4952、X-22-4272、X-22-6266、KF-351A、K354L、KF-355A、KF-945、KF-640、KF-642、KF-643、X-22-6191、X-22-4515、KF-6004、KP-341、KF-6001、KF-6002(以上為Shin-Etsu Silicone Co.,Ltd.製造)、F-4440、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上為Momentive Performance Materials Inc.製造)、BYK307、BYK323、BYK330(以上為BYK Chemie公司製造)等。Specific examples of surfactants include DOWSIL 8032 ADDITIVE, Toray Silicone DC3PA, Toray Silicone SH7PA, Toray Silicone DC11PA, Toray Silicone SH21PA, Toray Silicone SH28PA, Toray Silicone SH29PA, Toray Silicone SH30PA, and Toray Silicone SH8400 (the above are Dow (manufactured by Corning Toray Silicone Co., Ltd.) and X-22-4952, , KF-643, , TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (the above are manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials Inc.), BYK307, BYK323, BYK330 (the above are manufactured by BYK Chemie Company), etc.

界面活性劑可以單獨使用1種,亦能夠併用2種以上。 在感光性層包含界面活性劑之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,界面活性劑的含量為0.01~3.0質量%為較佳,0.01~1.0質量%為更佳,0.05~0.80質量%為進一步較佳。 One type of surfactant may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination. When the photosensitive layer contains a surfactant, the surfactant content is preferably 0.01 to 3.0 mass%, more preferably 0.01 to 1.0 mass%, and 0.05 to 0.80 mass% relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. For further improvement.

-聚合抑制劑- 感光性層可以包含聚合抑制劑。 聚合抑制劑係指具有延遲或抑制聚合反應之功能之化合物。作為聚合抑制劑,例如能夠使用用作聚合抑制劑之公知的化合物。 -Polymerization inhibitor- The photosensitive layer may contain a polymerization inhibitor. Polymerization inhibitors refer to compounds that have the function of delaying or inhibiting polymerization reactions. As the polymerization inhibitor, for example, known compounds used as polymerization inhibitors can be used.

作為聚合抑制劑,例如可舉出啡噻𠯤、雙-(1-二甲基苄基)啡噻𠯤及3,7-二辛基啡噻𠯤等啡噻𠯤化合物;雙[3-(3-三級丁基-4-羥基-5-甲基苯基)丙酸][乙烯基雙(氧乙烯)]2,4-雙〔(硬脂基硫基)甲基〕-鄰甲酚、1,3,5-三(3,5-二-三級丁基-4-羥基苄基)、1,3,5-三(4-三級丁基-3-羥基-2,6-二甲基苄基)、2,4-雙-(正辛硫基)-6-(4-羥基-3,5-二-三級丁基苯胺基)-1,3,5-三𠯤及新戊四醇四3-(3,5-二-三級丁基-4-羥基苯基)丙酸酯等受阻酚化合物;4-亞硝基苯酚、N-亞硝基二苯基胺、N-亞硝基環己基羥基胺及N-亞硝基苯基羥基胺等亞硝基化合物或其鹽;甲基氫醌、三級丁基氫醌、2,5-二-三級丁基氫醌及4-苯醌等醌化合物;4-甲氧基苯酚、4-甲氧基-1-萘酚及三級丁基鄰苯二酚等酚化合物;二丁基二硫代胺甲酸銅、二乙基二硫代胺甲酸銅、二乙基二硫代胺甲酸錳及二苯基二硫代胺甲酸錳等金屬鹽化合物。 其中,就本發明之效果更優異的觀點而言,作為聚合抑制劑,選自包括啡噻𠯤化合物、亞硝基化合物或其鹽及受阻酚化合物之群組中之至少1種為較佳,啡噻𠯤、雙[3-(3-三級丁基-4-羥基-5-甲基苯基)丙酸][乙烯基雙(氧乙烯)]2,4-雙〔(硬脂基硫基)甲基〕-鄰甲酚、1,3,5-三(3,5-二-三級丁基-4-羥基芐基)及N-亞硝基苯羥胺鋁鹽為更佳。 Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include phenanthridine, bis-(1-dimethylbenzyl)phenanthridine and 3,7-dioctylphenanthridine; bis[3-(3-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl)propionate][vinylbis(ethylene oxide)]2,4-bis[(stearylthio)methyl]-o-cresol, 1,3,5-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl), 1,3,5-tris(4-tert-butyl-3-hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl), 2,4-bis-(n-octylthio)-6-(4-hydroxy-3,5-di-tert-butylanilino)-1,3,5-tris(1,3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl), 1,3,5-tris(4-tert-butyl-3-hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl), 1,3,5-tris(1,3,5-di-tert-butyl-2,6-dimethylbenzyl), 1,3,5-tris(1,3,5-di-tert-butyl-3-hydroxy ... Hindered phenol compounds such as pentylene glycol tetrakis 3-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate; nitroso compounds or their salts such as 4-nitrosophenol, N-nitrosodiphenylamine, N-nitrosocyclohexylhydroxyamine and N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine; quinone compounds such as methylhydroquinone, tert-butylhydroquinone, 2,5-di-tert-butylhydroquinone and 4-benzoquinone; phenol compounds such as 4-methoxyphenol, 4-methoxy-1-naphthol and tert-butyl o-catechin; metal salt compounds such as copper dibutyldithiocarbamate, copper diethyldithiocarbamate, manganese diethyldithiocarbamate and manganese diphenyldithiocarbamate. Among them, from the viewpoint of the better effect of the present invention, as the polymerization inhibitor, at least one selected from the group including thiophene compounds, nitroso compounds or their salts and hindered phenol compounds is preferred, and thiophene, bis[3-(3-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl)propionic acid][vinylbis(ethylene oxide)]2,4-bis[(stearylthio)methyl]-o-cresol, 1,3,5-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl) and N-nitrosobenzoylamine aluminum salt are more preferred.

聚合抑制劑可以單獨使用1種,亦可以併用2種以上。 在感光性層包含聚合抑制劑之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,聚合抑制劑的含量為0.001~5.0質量%為較佳,0.01~3.0質量%為更佳,0.02~2.0質量%為進一步較佳。相對於聚合性化合物總質量,聚合抑制劑的含量為0.005~5.0質量%為較佳,0.01~3.0質量%為更佳,0.01~1.0質量%為進一步較佳。 One type of polymerization inhibitor may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination. When the photosensitive layer contains a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.001 to 5.0 mass%, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0 mass%, and 0.02 to 2.0 mass% relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. For further improvement. The content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.005 to 5.0 mass%, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0 mass%, and further preferably 0.01 to 1.0 mass% relative to the total mass of the polymerizable compound.

-供氫性化合物- 感光性層可以包含供氫性化合物。 供氫性化合物具有進一步提高光聚合起始劑對活性光線的靈敏度及抑制由氧引起之聚合性化合物的聚合阻礙等作用。 -Hydrogen donating compound- The photosensitive layer may contain a hydrogen donating compound. The hydrogen-donating compound has the functions of further improving the sensitivity of the photopolymerization initiator to active light and inhibiting the polymerization inhibition of the polymerizable compound caused by oxygen.

作為供氫性化合物,例如可舉出胺類及胺基酸化合物。Examples of the hydrogen-donating compound include amines and amino acid compounds.

作為胺類,例如可舉出M.R.Sander等人著“Journal of Polymer Society”第10卷3173頁(1972)、日本特公昭44-020189號公報、日本特開昭51-082102號公報、日本特開昭52-134692號公報、日本特開昭59-138205號公報、日本特開昭60-084305號公報、日本特開昭62-018537號公報、日本特開昭64-033104號公報及Research Disclosure 33825號等中記載之化合物。更具體而言,可舉出4,4’-雙(二乙基胺基)二苯甲酮、三(4-二甲基胺基苯基)甲烷(別名:無色結晶紫)、三乙醇胺、對二甲基胺基苯甲酸乙酯、對甲醯基二甲基苯胺及對甲硫基二甲基苯胺。 其中,就本發明的效果更優異的觀點而言,作為胺類,選自包括4,4’-雙(二乙基胺基)二苯甲酮及三(4-二甲基胺基苯基)甲烷之群組中之至少1種為較佳。 Examples of the amines include "Journal of Polymer Society" by M.R. Sander et al., Vol. 10, page 3173 (1972), Japanese Patent Publication No. 44-020189, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-082102, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-082102 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. Sho 52-134692, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. Sho 59-138205, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. Sho 60-084305, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. Sho 62-018537, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. Sho 64-033104, and Research Disclosure 33825 Compounds listed in No. etc. More specifically, 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, tris(4-dimethylaminophenyl)methane (alias: colorless crystal violet), triethanolamine, Ethyl p-dimethylaminobenzoate, p-formyldimethylaniline and p-methylthiodimethylaniline. Among them, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent, the amines are selected from the group consisting of 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone and tris(4-dimethylaminophenyl). ), at least one of the methane group is preferred.

作為胺基酸化合物,例如可舉出N-苯甘胺酸、N-甲基-N-苯甘胺酸、N-乙基-N-苯甘胺酸。 其中,就本發明的效果更優異的觀點而言,作為胺基酸化合物,N-苯甘胺酸為較佳。 Examples of the amino acid compound include N-phenylglycine, N-methyl-N-phenylglycine, and N-ethyl-N-phenylglycine. Among them, N-phenylglycine is preferable as the amino acid compound from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.

又,作為供氫性化合物,例如還可舉出日本特公昭48-042965號公報中記載之有機金屬化合物(乙酸三丁基錫等)、日本特公昭55-034414號公報中記載之供氫體及日本特開平6-308727號公報中記載之硫化合物(三噻烷(trithiane)等)。Examples of hydrogen-donating compounds include organometallic compounds (tributyltin acetate, etc.) described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-042965, hydrogen donors described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 55-034414, and sulfur compounds (trithiane, etc.) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-308727.

供氫性化合物可以單獨使用1種,亦可以併用2種以上。 在感光性層包含供氫性化合物之情況下,就藉由聚合成長速度與鏈轉移的平衡來提高硬化速度之觀點而言,相對於感光性層的總質量,供氫性化合物的含量為0.01~10.0質量%為較佳,0.01~8.0質量%為更佳,0.03~5.0質量%為進一步較佳。 One type of hydrogen-donating compound may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination. When the photosensitive layer contains a hydrogen-donating compound, from the viewpoint of increasing the curing speed by balancing the polymerization growth rate and chain transfer, the content of the hydrogen-donating compound is 0.01 relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. It is preferably ∼10.0 mass%, more preferably 0.01 to 8.0 mass%, and still more preferably 0.03 to 5.0 mass%.

-殘留單體- 感光性層有時包含上述鹼溶性樹脂的各構成單元的殘留單體。 就圖案化性及可靠性的觀點而言,相對於鹼溶性樹脂的總質量,殘留單體的含量為5,000質量ppm以下為較佳,2,000質量ppm以下為更佳,500質量ppm以下為進一步較佳。下限不受特別限制,1質量ppm以上為較佳,10質量ppm以上為更佳。 就圖案化性及可靠性的觀點而言,相對於感光性層的總質量,鹼溶性樹脂的各構成單元的殘留單體3,000質量ppm以下為較佳,600質量ppm以下為更佳,100質量ppm以下為進一步較佳。下限不受特別限制,0.1質量ppm以上為較佳,1質量ppm以上為更佳。 -Residual monomers- The photosensitive layer sometimes contains residual monomers of each constituent unit of the above-mentioned alkali-soluble resin. From the viewpoint of patterning and reliability, the content of residual monomers is preferably 5,000 mass ppm or less, more preferably 2,000 mass ppm or less, and further preferably 500 mass ppm or less relative to the total mass of the alkali-soluble resin. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but 1 mass ppm or more is preferably, and 10 mass ppm or more is more preferably. From the viewpoint of patterning and reliability, the content of residual monomers of each constituent unit of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 3,000 mass ppm or less, more preferably 600 mass ppm or less, and further preferably 100 mass ppm or less relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but 0.1 mass ppm or more is preferred, and 1 mass ppm or more is even more preferred.

藉由高分子反應合成鹼溶性樹脂時的單體的殘留單體量亦設在上述範圍內為較佳。例如,在使羧酸側鏈與丙烯酸環氧丙酯進行反應而合成鹼溶性樹脂之情況下,將丙烯酸環氧丙酯的含量設在上述範圍內為較佳。 殘留單體的量能夠藉由液體層析法及氣相層析法等公知的方法來測量。 When the alkali-soluble resin is synthesized by polymer reaction, the residual monomer amount of the monomer is also preferably within the above range. For example, when a carboxylic acid side chain and glycidyl acrylate are reacted to synthesize an alkali-soluble resin, the content of glycidyl acrylate is preferably within the above range. The amount of residual monomer can be measured by known methods such as liquid chromatography and gas chromatography.

-其他成分- 感光性層可以包含除已敘述之成分以外的成分(以下,亦稱為“其他成分”。)。作為其他成分,例如可舉出粒子(例如,金屬氧化物粒子)、著色劑、抗氧化劑、反射性調整劑、光吸收性物質、增感劑及鏈轉移劑。又,作為其他成分,還可舉出日本特開2000-310706號公報的[0058]~[0071]段中記載之其他添加劑。 -Other ingredients- The photosensitive layer may contain components other than those described above (hereinafter also referred to as "other components"). Examples of other components include particles (for example, metal oxide particles), colorants, antioxidants, reflectivity adjusters, light absorbing substances, sensitizers, and chain transfer agents. Examples of other components include other additives described in paragraphs [0058] to [0071] of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-310706.

--粒子-- 作為粒子,金屬氧化物粒子為較佳。 金屬氧化物粒子中的金屬還包含B、Si、Ge、As、Sb及Te等半金屬。 例如,就硬化膜的透明性的觀點而言,粒子的平均一次粒徑為1~200nm為較佳,3~80nm為更佳。 藉由使用電子顯微鏡測量任意200個粒子的粒徑並將測量結果進行算術平均來計算粒子的平均一次粒徑。另外,在粒子的形狀不是球形之情況下,將最長邊作為粒徑。 --Particles-- Metal oxide particles are preferred as particles. The metal in the metal oxide particles also includes semimetals such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb and Te. For example, from the perspective of the transparency of the cured film, the average primary particle size of the particles is preferably 1 to 200 nm, and more preferably 3 to 80 nm. The average primary particle size of the particles is calculated by measuring the particle size of any 200 particles using an electron microscope and arithmetically averaging the measurement results. In addition, when the shape of the particles is not spherical, the longest side is used as the particle size.

--著色劑-- 感光性層可以包含微量的著色劑(顏料、染料等)。 --Colorants-- The photosensitive layer may contain trace amounts of colorants (pigments, dyes, etc.).

--抗氧化劑-- 作為抗氧化劑,例如可舉出1-苯基-3-吡唑啉酮(pyrazolidone)(別名:菲尼酮(phenidone))、1-苯基-4,4-二甲基-3-吡唑啉酮及1-苯基-4-甲基-4-羥基甲基-3-吡唑啉酮等3-吡唑啉酮類;氫醌、兒茶酚、五倍子酚、甲基氫醌及氯氫醌等多羥基苯類;對甲基胺基苯酚、對胺基苯酚、對羥基苯甘胺酸及對苯二胺。 其中,就本發明的效果更優異的觀點而言,作為抗氧化劑,3-吡唑啉酮類為較佳,1-苯基-3-吡唑啉酮為更佳。 --Antioxidants-- As antioxidants, for example, 3-pyrazolones such as 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone (also known as phenidone), 1-phenyl-4,4-dimethyl-3-pyrazolone and 1-phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolone; polyhydroxybenzenes such as hydroquinone, catechol, gallol, methylhydroquinone and chlorohydroquinone; p-methylaminophenol, p-aminophenol, p-hydroxyphenylglycine and p-phenylenediamine can be cited. Among them, from the viewpoint of the more excellent effect of the present invention, 3-pyrazolones are preferred as antioxidants, and 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolone is more preferred.

-反射性調整劑- 感光性層包含選自包括白色顏料、金屬粒子、中空粒子及液晶化合物(尤其,膽固醇型液晶化合物的顏料粒子)之群組中之1種以上的反射性調整劑為較佳。在感光性層包含反射性調整劑之情況下,能夠設為光反射層前驅物層。 在感光性層包含反射性調整劑之情況下,依據本發明的第1實施形態形成之積層體的樹脂圖案的光反射性更優異。另外,在感光性層包含白色顏料或中空粒子之情況下,感光性層容易成為白色層,容易得到後述之特性X1的光反射層。另一方面,在感光性層包含金屬粒子或液晶化合物(尤其,膽固醇型液晶化合物的顏料粒子)之情況下,由於由金屬粒子或液晶化合物引起之反射性,容易得到後述之特性X2及特性X3的光反射層。 -Reflectivity adjuster- It is preferred that the photosensitive layer contains one or more reflectivity adjusters selected from the group including white pigments, metal particles, hollow particles and liquid crystal compounds (especially, pigment particles of cholesteric liquid crystal compounds). When the photosensitive layer contains the reflectivity adjuster, it can be set as a light reflective layer precursor layer. When the photosensitive layer contains the reflectivity adjuster, the light reflectivity of the resin pattern of the laminate formed according to the first embodiment of the present invention is more excellent. In addition, when the photosensitive layer contains white pigments or hollow particles, the photosensitive layer easily becomes a white layer, and it is easy to obtain a light reflective layer of characteristic X1 described later. On the other hand, when the photosensitive layer contains metal particles or liquid crystal compounds (especially, pigment particles of cholesteric liquid crystal compounds), it is easy to obtain a light reflective layer of the characteristics X2 and X3 described later due to the reflectivity caused by the metal particles or the liquid crystal compounds.

--白色顏料-- 作為白色顏料,可舉出氧化鈦、氧化鋅、鋅鋇白、輕質碳酸鈣、白炭黑、氧化鋁、氫氧化鋁及硫酸鋇等。又,作為白色顏料,就本發明的效果更優異的觀點而言,折射率比感光性層所包含之聚合性化合物的硬化物高的粒子為較佳,其中,氧化鈦為更佳,金紅石型或銳鈦礦型的氧化鈦為進一步較佳,金紅石型氧化鈦為特佳。 白色顏料的表面可以實施二氧化矽處理、氧化鋁處理、二氧化鈦處理、氧化鋯處理及有機物處理等處理。 又,在感光性層包含白色顏料之情況下,感光性層還可以包含顏料分散劑。 --white pigment-- Examples of white pigments include titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zinc oxide, light calcium carbonate, white carbon black, aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, barium sulfate, and the like. In addition, as the white pigment, from the viewpoint of more excellent effects of the present invention, particles having a higher refractive index than the cured product of the polymerizable compound included in the photosensitive layer are preferred, and among these, titanium oxide is more preferred, and rutile is more preferred. Type or anatase titanium oxide is further preferred, and rutile titanium oxide is particularly preferred. The surface of the white pigment can be treated with silica treatment, alumina treatment, titanium dioxide treatment, zirconium oxide treatment, and organic matter treatment. Furthermore, when the photosensitive layer contains a white pigment, the photosensitive layer may further contain a pigment dispersant.

作為白色顏料的形狀,不受特別限制,例如可舉出球狀、不定形、板狀、針狀及多面體等。 作為白色顏料的平均一次粒徑,不受特別限制,例如50~1000nm為較佳,100~500nm為更佳。 另外,白色顏料的平均一次粒徑為藉由使用透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)之觀測而測量任意100個粒子的直徑,並藉由100個直徑的算數平均而求出之值。又,白色顏料的直徑係指將基於透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)之觀測圖像設為相同面積的圓時的直徑。 The shape of the white pigment is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include spherical, amorphous, plate-shaped, needle-shaped, polyhedron, and the like. The average primary particle size of the white pigment is not particularly limited, but for example, 50 to 1000 nm is preferred, and 100 to 500 nm is more preferred. In addition, the average primary particle diameter of the white pigment is a value obtained by measuring the diameters of 100 arbitrary particles through observation using a transmission electron microscope (TEM) and calculating the arithmetic average of the 100 diameters. In addition, the diameter of the white pigment refers to the diameter when the observation image by a transmission electron microscope (TEM) is a circle of the same area.

--金屬粒子-- 就具有高反射性之觀點而言,作為金屬粒子所包含之金屬的種類,銀、鎳、鈷、鐵、銅、鈀、金、鉑、錫、鋅、鋁、鎢或鈦為較佳,銀、金、錫、鎳、鋁或鈷為更佳,就可見光區域中顯示更高的反射性之觀點而言,金、銀或鋁為進一步較佳,銀為特佳。 金屬粒子可以為金屬單體粒子,亦可以為金屬合金粒子。另外,在金屬粒子為金屬合金粒子之情況下,作為金屬合金粒子,上述金屬種類中的2種以上的合金粒子為較佳。 --metal particles-- From the viewpoint of high reflectivity, the type of metal contained in the metal particles is preferably silver, nickel, cobalt, iron, copper, palladium, gold, platinum, tin, zinc, aluminum, tungsten or titanium, and silver , gold, tin, nickel, aluminum or cobalt are more preferred. From the viewpoint of exhibiting higher reflectivity in the visible light region, gold, silver or aluminum is further preferred, and silver is particularly preferred. The metal particles may be metal single particles or metal alloy particles. In addition, when the metal particles are metal alloy particles, the metal alloy particles are preferably two or more types of alloy particles among the above-mentioned metal types.

作為金屬粒子的形狀,不受特別限制,例如可舉出球狀、不定形、板狀、針狀及多面體等。 作為金屬粒子的平均一次粒徑,不受特別限制,例如1~5000nm為較佳,5~1000nm為更佳。 另外,金屬粒子的平均一次粒徑為藉由使用透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)之觀測而測量任意100個粒子的直徑,並藉由100個直徑的算數平均而求出之值。又,金屬粒子的直徑係指將基於透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)之觀測圖像設為相同面積的圓時的直徑。 金屬粒子例如日本特開平10-183207號公報中揭示那樣,能夠藉由有機金屬化合物的還原等方法來製作。 The shape of the metal particles is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include spherical, amorphous, plate-shaped, needle-shaped, polyhedron, and the like. The average primary particle diameter of the metal particles is not particularly limited, but for example, 1 to 5000 nm is preferred, and 5 to 1000 nm is more preferred. In addition, the average primary particle diameter of metal particles is a value obtained by measuring the diameters of 100 arbitrary particles through observation using a transmission electron microscope (TEM) and calculating the arithmetic average of the 100 diameters. In addition, the diameter of a metal particle refers to the diameter when the observation image by a transmission electron microscope (TEM) is a circle of the same area. Metal particles can be produced by methods such as reduction of organic metal compounds, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-183207.

--中空粒子-- 中空粒子只要是在內部具有空腔之粒子,則不受特別限制,例如可舉出中空無機粒子及中空樹脂粒子。 作為中空無機粒子,例如由選自包括二氧化矽、氧化鋁、氧化鋯、氧化鈦及它們的複合氧化物之群組中之金屬氧化物構成殼部之中空無機粒子為較佳。 作為中空樹脂粒子,可舉出由苯乙烯系樹脂、丙烯酸系樹脂、矽酮系樹脂、丙烯酸-苯乙烯系樹脂、氯乙烯系樹脂、偏二氯乙烯系樹脂、醯胺系樹脂、胺酯系樹脂、酚系樹脂、苯乙烯-共軛二烯系樹脂、丙烯酸-共軛二烯系樹脂及烯烴系樹脂等聚合物、以及該等聚合物的交聯體等有機物構成殼部之中空樹脂粒子。 中空粒子例如亦可以進行電漿放電處理及電暈放電處理等物理表面處理、或基於界面活性劑及耦合劑等之化學表面處理。 --Hollow Particles-- The hollow particles are not particularly limited as long as they have a cavity inside. Examples thereof include hollow inorganic particles and hollow resin particles. As the hollow inorganic particles, for example, it is preferable that the shell portion of the hollow inorganic particles is made of a metal oxide selected from the group consisting of silica, alumina, zirconium oxide, titanium oxide, and composite oxides thereof. Examples of hollow resin particles include styrene resins, acrylic resins, silicone resins, acrylic-styrene resins, vinyl chloride resins, vinylidene chloride resins, amide resins, and urethane resins. Resins, polymers such as phenolic resins, styrene-conjugated diene resins, acrylic-conjugated diene resins, and olefin resins, and organic substances such as crosslinked products of these polymers constitute the hollow resin particles in the shell. . The hollow particles may also be subjected to physical surface treatment such as plasma discharge treatment and corona discharge treatment, or chemical surface treatment based on surfactants, coupling agents, and the like.

中空粒子的形狀不受特別限制,例如可舉出球狀、破碎狀、纖維狀、針狀及鱗片狀等。 作為中空粒子的平均一次粒徑,不受特別限制,例如50~5000nm為較佳,100~1000nm為更佳。 另外,中空粒子的平均一次粒徑為藉由使用透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)之觀測而測量任意100個粒子的直徑,並藉由100個直徑的算數平均而求出之值。又,中空粒子的直徑係指將基於透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)之觀測圖像設為相同面積的圓時的直徑。 The shape of the hollow particles is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include spherical, crushed, fibrous, needle-shaped, and scale-shaped. The average primary particle size of the hollow particles is not particularly limited, but for example, 50 to 5000 nm is preferred, and 100 to 1000 nm is more preferred. In addition, the average primary particle diameter of hollow particles is a value obtained by measuring the diameters of 100 arbitrary particles through observation using a transmission electron microscope (TEM) and calculating the arithmetic average of the 100 diameters. In addition, the diameter of a hollow particle refers to the diameter when the observation image by a transmission electron microscope (TEM) is a circle of the same area.

--液晶化合物-- 作為液晶化合物,可舉出具有液晶性之化合物。另外,液晶化合物亦可以以既定配向狀態固定。亦即,感光性層可以包含使配向之聚合性液晶化合物聚合而成之聚合物。在上述聚合物中,配向狀態被固定。 作為液晶化合物,就反射性更優異的觀點而言,將膽固醇型液晶配向之聚合性液晶化合物聚合而成之聚合物(換言之,膽固醇型液晶配向被固定之聚合物)為較佳。藉由使用包含向列液晶性化合物和手性劑之膽固醇型液晶組成物,以呈現膽固醇型液晶相之狀態使液晶組成物硬化而得到膽固醇型液晶配向被固定之聚合物。膽固醇型液晶配向被固定之聚合物通常具有選擇性地反射圓偏光之圓偏光選擇反射功能。 又,膽固醇型液晶配向被固定之聚合物以液晶粒子的形態包含於感光性層中為較佳。換言之,感光性層包含包括膽固醇型液晶配向被固定之聚合物之液晶粒子為較佳。 液晶粒子的形狀不受特別限定,就分散性更優異的觀點而言,薄片為較佳。作為薄片的平均一次粒徑,例如1~120μm為較佳,1~100μm為更佳。 另外,液晶粒子的平均一次粒徑為藉由使用透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)之觀測而測量任意100個粒子的直徑,並藉由100個直徑的算數平均而求出之值。又,液晶粒子的直徑係指將基於透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)之觀測圖像設為相同面積的圓時的直徑。 --Liquid crystal compounds-- Examples of the liquid crystal compound include compounds having liquid crystallinity. In addition, the liquid crystal compound may also be fixed in a predetermined alignment state. That is, the photosensitive layer may contain a polymer obtained by polymerizing an aligned polymerizable liquid crystal compound. In the above polymer, the alignment state is fixed. As the liquid crystal compound, a polymer obtained by polymerizing a polymerizable liquid crystal compound with a cholesteric liquid crystal alignment (in other words, a polymer in which the cholesteric liquid crystal alignment is fixed) is preferred from the viewpoint of more excellent reflectivity. By using a cholesteric liquid crystal composition containing a nematic liquid crystal compound and a chiral agent, and hardening the liquid crystal composition in a state of exhibiting a cholesteric liquid crystal phase, a polymer in which the alignment of the cholesteric liquid crystal is fixed is obtained. The polymer in which the alignment of cholesteric liquid crystal is fixed usually has a circularly polarized light selective reflection function that selectively reflects circularly polarized light. Moreover, it is preferable that the polymer which fixes the alignment of cholesteric liquid crystal is contained in the photosensitive layer in the form of liquid crystal particles. In other words, the photosensitive layer preferably contains liquid crystal particles including a polymer in which the alignment of cholesteric liquid crystal is fixed. The shape of the liquid crystal particles is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of better dispersibility, flakes are preferred. The average primary particle size of the flakes is, for example, preferably 1 to 120 μm, more preferably 1 to 100 μm. In addition, the average primary particle diameter of liquid crystal particles is a value obtained by measuring the diameters of 100 arbitrary particles through observation using a transmission electron microscope (TEM) and calculating the arithmetic average of the 100 diameters. In addition, the diameter of a liquid crystal particle refers to the diameter when the observation image by a transmission electron microscope (TEM) is a circle of the same area.

作為液晶粒子的市售品,例如可舉出“HELICONE HC Sapphire”、“HELICONE HC Aquarius”、“HELICONE HC Scarabeus”、“HELICONE HC Jade”及“HELICONE HC Maple”(均為wacker asahikasei silicone co.,ltd.製造)等。Examples of commercially available liquid crystal particles include "HELICONE HC Sapphire", "HELICONE HC Aquarius", "HELICONE HC Scarabeus", "HELICONE HC Jade", and "HELICONE HC Maple" (all manufactured by Wacker Asahikasei Silicone Co., Ltd.).

在感光性層包含反射性調整劑之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,反射性調整劑的含量為10~90質量%為較佳,20~85質量%為更佳,30~80質量%為進一步較佳。 尤其,在反射性調整劑包含白色顏料之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,白色顏料的含量為30~80質量%為較佳,40~70質量%為更佳。又,在反射性調整劑包含金屬粒子之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,金屬粒子的含量為20~95質量%為較佳,30~90質量%為更佳。又,在反射性調整劑包含中空粒子之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,中空粒子的含量為20~80質量%為較佳,30~70質量%為更佳。又,在反射性調整劑包含液晶化合物(較佳為液晶粒子)之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,液晶化合物(較佳為液晶粒子)的含量為10~90質量%為較佳,20~80質量%為更佳,30~70質量%為進一步較佳。 When the photosensitive layer includes a reflective modifier, the content of the reflective modifier is preferably 10 to 90 mass %, more preferably 20 to 85 mass %, and further preferably 30 to 80 mass % relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. In particular, when the reflective modifier includes a white pigment, the content of the white pigment is preferably 30 to 80 mass %, and more preferably 40 to 70 mass %, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Furthermore, when the reflective modifier includes metal particles, the content of the metal particles is preferably 20 to 95 mass %, and more preferably 30 to 90 mass %, relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. Furthermore, when the reflectivity modifier contains hollow particles, the content of the hollow particles is preferably 20 to 80 mass % relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, and 30 to 70 mass % is more preferably. Furthermore, when the reflectivity modifier contains liquid crystal compounds (preferably liquid crystal particles), the content of the liquid crystal compounds (preferably liquid crystal particles) is preferably 10 to 90 mass % relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer, and 20 to 80 mass % is more preferably, and 30 to 70 mass % is further preferably.

-光吸收性物質- 感光性層包含光吸收性物質亦較佳。在感光性層包含光吸收性物質之情況下,能夠形成光吸收層前驅物層。 在感光性層包含光吸收性物質之情況下,依據本發明的第1實施形態形成之積層體的樹脂圖案的外光反射性降低,及/或點亮發光元件時能夠發生之雜散光容易被吸收,其結果,在發光元件的非點亮時黑色緊固更優異。另外,在感光性層包含光吸收性物質之情況下,容易得到後述之特性Y1及/或特性Y2的光吸收層。 -Light absorbing substance- It is also preferable that the photosensitive layer contains a light absorbing substance. When the photosensitive layer contains a light absorbing substance, a light absorbing layer precursor layer can be formed. When the photosensitive layer contains a light-absorbing material, the external light reflectivity of the resin pattern of the laminate formed according to the first embodiment of the present invention is reduced, and/or stray light that may be generated when the light-emitting element is lit is easily absorbed. As a result, black fastening is more excellent when the light-emitting element is not lit. In addition, when the photosensitive layer contains a light-absorbing substance, a light-absorbing layer having characteristics Y1 and/or Y2 described below can be easily obtained.

作為光吸收性物質,不受特別限制,例如可舉出黑色顏料,具體而言,可舉出炭黑、鈦黑、鈦碳、氧化鐵、氧化鈦及石墨等,炭黑為更佳。The light absorbing material is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include black pigments, and specifically, carbon black, titanium black, titanium carbon, iron oxide, titanium oxide, and graphite, among which carbon black is more preferred.

在光吸收性物質為黑色顏料之情況下,作為其形狀,不受特別限制,例如可舉出球狀、不定形、板狀、針狀及多面體等。 作為光吸收性物質的平均一次粒徑,不受特別限制,例如1~1000nm為較佳,2~500nm為更佳。 另外,光吸收性物質的平均一次粒徑為藉由使用透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)之觀測而測量任意100個粒子的直徑,並藉由100個直徑的算數平均而求出之值。又,光吸收性物質的直徑係指將基於透射型電子顯微鏡(TEM)之觀測圖像設為相同面積的圓時的直徑。 光吸收性物質例如亦可以進行電漿放電處理及電暈放電處理等物理表面處理、或基於界面活性劑、耦合劑及樹脂等之化學表面處理。 When the light-absorbing substance is a black pigment, its shape is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include spherical, amorphous, plate-like, needle-like, and polyhedral. The average primary particle size of the light-absorbing substance is not particularly limited, and for example, 1 to 1000 nm is preferred, and 2 to 500 nm is more preferred. In addition, the average primary particle size of the light-absorbing substance is the value obtained by measuring the diameter of any 100 particles by observation using a transmission electron microscope (TEM) and calculating the arithmetic average of the 100 diameters. In addition, the diameter of the light-absorbing substance refers to the diameter when the observation image based on the transmission electron microscope (TEM) is set to a circle of the same area. Light-absorbing materials can also undergo physical surface treatments such as plasma discharge treatment and corona discharge treatment, or chemical surface treatments based on surfactants, coupling agents, and resins.

又,除黑色染料以外,光吸收性物質還可舉出藉由曝光或加熱等作用而變黑之化合物等。作為藉由曝光或加熱等作用而變黑之化合物,例如可舉出下述化合物(1)等。In addition to the black dye, examples of the light-absorbing substance include compounds that turn black by exposure, heating, or the like. Examples of compounds that turn black by exposure, heating, or the like include the following compound (1).

[化學式21] [Chemical formula 21]

在感光性層包含光吸收性物質之情況下,相對於感光性層的總質量,光吸收性物質的含量為5~80質量%為較佳,10~70質量%為更佳,10~60質量%為進一步較佳,10~50質量%為特佳。When the photosensitive layer contains a light absorbing substance, the content of the light absorbing substance is preferably 5 to 80 mass %, more preferably 10 to 70 mass %, further preferably 10 to 60 mass %, and particularly preferably 10 to 50 mass % relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer.

作為感光性層的厚度,例如1μm以上為較佳,2μm以上為更佳。作為上限值不受特別限制,例如100μm以下為較佳,50μm以下為更佳。The thickness of the photosensitive layer is, for example, preferably 1 μm or more, and more preferably 2 μm or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 100 μm or less is preferred, and 50 μm or less is more preferred.

(光反射層前驅物層及光吸收層前驅物層的較佳態樣) 如上所述,在感光性層包含反射性調整劑之情況下,能夠設為光反射層前驅物層,在感光性層包含光吸收性物質之情況下,能夠設為光吸收層前驅物層。 以下,對光吸收層前驅物層及光吸收層前驅物層的各較佳態樣進行說明。 (Preferred embodiments of a light-reflecting layer front-driver layer and a light-absorbing layer front-driver layer) As described above, when the photosensitive layer includes a reflective modifier, it can be set as a light-reflecting layer front-driver layer, and when the photosensitive layer includes a light-absorbing substance, it can be set as a light-absorbing layer front-driver layer. The following describes the preferred embodiments of the light-absorbing layer front-driver layer and the light-absorbing layer front-driver layer.

・光反射層前驅物層 ・・光反射層前驅物層的厚度 作為光反射層前驅物層的厚度,3μm以上為較佳,5μm以上為更佳,10μm以上為進一步較佳,16μm以上為特佳。作為上限值不受特別限制,例如100μm以下為較佳,50μm以下為更佳。 ・Light reflective layer precursor layer ・・Thickness of light reflective layer precursor layer The thickness of the light reflective layer precursor layer is preferably 3 μm or more, more preferably 5 μm or more, further preferably 10 μm or more, and particularly preferably 16 μm or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 100 μm or less is preferred, and 50 μm or less is more preferred.

・・由光反射層前驅物層形成之光反射層的特性 由光反射層前驅物層形成之光反射層為滿足以下特性X1、特性X2及特性X3中的至少一個之層為較佳。尤其,在發光元件為可見光LED之情況下,作為光反射層,滿足特性X1及特性X2中的至少一者之層為較佳,在發光元件中的LED為UV-LED之情況下,作為光反射層,滿足特性X3之層為較佳。 《特性X1》 光反射層的全反射(入射角8°,光源:D-65(2°視場))在CIE1976(L *、a *、b *)顏色空間中,L *值為80以上為較佳。 另外,上述CIE 1976(L *、a *、b *)顏色空間中的L *值為在25℃使用分光光度計對厚度30μm的光反射層進行測量之值。作為分光光度計,例如能夠使用JASCO Corporation製造的分光光度計V-570。 作為上述L *值,90以上為更佳。作為上限值,為100以下。 《特性X2》 光反射層的波長550nm下的全反射率為60%以上為較佳,80%以上為更佳。作為上限值,為100%以下。另外,波長550nm的全反射率為在25℃使用分光光度計對厚度30μm的光反射層進行測量之值。作為分光光度計,例如能夠使用JASCO Corporation製造的分光光度計V-570。 《特性X3》 光反射層的波長385nm的全反射率為60%以上為較佳,80%以上為更佳。作為上限值,為100%以下。波長385nm的全反射率為在25℃使用分光光度計對厚度30μm的光反射層進行測量之值。作為分光光度計,例如能夠使用JASCO Corporation製造的分光光度計V-570。 ・・Characteristics of the light reflective layer formed from the light reflective layer precursor layer The light reflective layer formed from the light reflective layer precursor layer is preferably a layer that satisfies at least one of the following characteristics X1, X2, and X3. In particular, when the light-emitting element is a visible light LED, the light reflection layer is preferably a layer that satisfies at least one of the characteristics X1 and X2. When the LED in the light-emitting element is a UV-LED, as the light reflection layer As for the reflective layer, the layer that satisfies characteristic X3 is preferred. " Characteristics For better. In addition, the L * value in the above-mentioned CIE 1976 (L * , a * , b * ) color space is a value measured using a spectrophotometer at 25°C on a light reflective layer with a thickness of 30 μm. As a spectrophotometer, for example, spectrophotometer V-570 manufactured by JASCO Corporation can be used. As the above-mentioned L * value, 90 or more is more preferable. The upper limit is 100 or less. <Characteristics The upper limit is 100% or less. In addition, the total reflectance at a wavelength of 550 nm is a value measured using a spectrophotometer at 25° C. on a light reflective layer with a thickness of 30 μm. As a spectrophotometer, for example, spectrophotometer V-570 manufactured by JASCO Corporation can be used. <Characteristics The upper limit is 100% or less. The total reflectance at a wavelength of 385 nm is measured using a spectrophotometer at 25°C on a light reflective layer with a thickness of 30 μm. As a spectrophotometer, for example, spectrophotometer V-570 manufactured by JASCO Corporation can be used.

・光吸收層前驅物層 ・・光吸收層前驅物層的厚度 作為光吸收層前驅物層的厚度,1μm以上為較佳,2μm以上為更佳。作為上限值不受特別限制,例如10μm以下為較佳,5μm以下為更佳。 ・・光吸收層前驅物層的光學濃度 作為光吸收層前驅物層的波長550nm下的光學濃度(OD),0.5以上為較佳,1.0以上為更佳,2.0以上為進一步較佳,3.0以上為特佳。作為上限值,不受特別限制,例如6.0以下為較佳。光吸收層前驅物層的光學濃度能夠藉由Macbeth濃度計(Macbeth公司製造,TD-904,使用可見濾光器)等進行測量。 作為光吸收層前驅物層的波長385nm下的光學濃度(OD),0.5以上為較佳,1.0以上為更佳,2.0以上為進一步較佳,3.0以上為特佳。作為上限值,不受特別限制,例如6.0以下為較佳。光吸收層前驅物層的波長385nm的光學濃度能夠藉由紫外分光光度計U-3310(Hitachi, Ltd.製造)等進行測量。 ・Light absorbing layer precursor layer ・・Thickness of light absorption layer precursor layer The thickness of the light absorbing layer precursor layer is preferably 1 μm or more, and more preferably 2 μm or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 10 μm or less is preferred, and 5 μm or less is more preferred. ・・Optical concentration of light absorption layer precursor layer The optical density (OD) of the light absorbing layer precursor layer at a wavelength of 550 nm is preferably 0.5 or more, more preferably 1.0 or more, further preferably 2.0 or more, and particularly preferably 3.0 or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 6.0 or less is preferred. The optical concentration of the light-absorbing layer precursor layer can be measured with a Macbeth concentration meter (TD-904, manufactured by Macbeth Corporation, using a visible filter) or the like. The optical density (OD) of the light absorbing layer precursor layer at a wavelength of 385 nm is preferably 0.5 or more, more preferably 1.0 or more, further preferably 2.0 or more, and particularly preferably 3.0 or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 6.0 or less is preferred. The optical concentration of the light-absorbing layer precursor layer at a wavelength of 385 nm can be measured with an ultraviolet spectrophotometer U-3310 (manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.) or the like.

・・由光吸收層前驅物層形成之光吸收層的特性 由光吸收層前驅物層形成之光吸收層滿足特性Y1及/或特性Y2為較佳。尤其,在發光元件為可見光LED之情況下,作為光吸收層,就外光的反射防止性更優異的觀點而言,滿足特性Y1之層為較佳,在發光元件為UV-LED之情況下,作為光吸收層,就外光的反射防止性更優異的觀點及雜散光的抑制性更優異的觀點而言,滿足特性Y2之層為較佳。 ・・Characteristics of the light-absorbing layer formed from the light-absorbing layer precursor layer It is preferable that the light absorbing layer formed from the light absorbing layer precursor layer satisfies the characteristics Y1 and/or the characteristics Y2. In particular, when the light-emitting element is a visible light LED, as the light-absorbing layer, a layer that satisfies the characteristic Y1 is preferable from the viewpoint of better anti-reflection of external light. When the light-emitting element is a UV-LED , as the light-absorbing layer, a layer that satisfies the characteristic Y2 is preferable from the viewpoint of better anti-reflection of external light and better suppression of stray light.

《特性Y1》 作為光吸收層的波長550nm下的光學濃度(OD),0.5以上為較佳,1.0以上為更佳,2.0以上為進一步較佳,3.0以上為特佳。作為上限值,不受特別限制,例如6.0以下為較佳。光吸收層的光學濃度能夠藉由Macbeth濃度計(Macbeth公司製造,TD-904,使用可見濾光器)等進行測量。 《特性Y2》 作為光吸收層的波長385nm下的光學濃度(OD),0.5以上為較佳,1.0以上為更佳,2.0以上為進一步較佳,3.0以上為特佳。作為上限值,不受特別限制,例如6.0以下為較佳。光吸收層的波長385nm的光學濃度能夠藉由紫外分光光度計U-3310(Hitachi, Ltd.製造)等進行測量。 《Characteristic Y1》 As the optical density (OD) of the light absorbing layer at a wavelength of 550nm, 0.5 or more is preferred, 1.0 or more is more preferred, 2.0 or more is further preferred, and 3.0 or more is particularly preferred. As the upper limit value, there is no particular restriction, for example, 6.0 or less is preferred. The optical density of the light absorbing layer can be measured by a Macbeth density meter (manufactured by Macbeth, TD-904, using a visible filter). 《Characteristic Y2》 As the optical density (OD) of the light absorbing layer at a wavelength of 385nm, 0.5 or more is preferred, 1.0 or more is more preferred, 2.0 or more is further preferred, and 3.0 or more is particularly preferred. As the upper limit value, there is no particular restriction, for example, 6.0 or less is preferred. The optical concentration of the light absorbing layer at a wavelength of 385 nm can be measured by a UV spectrophotometer such as U-3310 (manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.).

《正型感光性層》 以下,對正型感光性層進行詳細敘述。 作為感光性層,可舉出至少包含聚合物和光酸產生劑之感光性層。作為上述聚合物,包含具有藉由酸的作用增大親水性之基(例如,極性基受到藉由酸的作用而脫離之脫離基的保護而成之酸分解性基等)之重複單元之聚合物為較佳。 作為感光性層,能夠適用公知的正型感光性層。 另外,感光性層亦可以為感光性的光反射層及感光性的光吸收層。在感光性層為感光性的光反射層之情況下,感光性層包含反射性調整劑,在感光性層為感光性的光吸收層之情況下,感光性層包含光吸收性物質。反射性調整劑及光吸收性物質的種類、及相對於感光性層的總質量的反射性調整劑及光吸收性物質的各含量與負型感光性層中的反射性調整劑及光吸收性物質的種類、及相對於感光性層的總質量的反射性調整劑及光吸收性物質的各含量相同,較佳範圍亦相同。 《Positive photosensitive layer》 The following describes the positive photosensitive layer in detail. As the photosensitive layer, a photosensitive layer including at least a polymer and a photoacid generator can be cited. As the above-mentioned polymer, a polymer including a repeating unit having a group whose hydrophilicity is increased by the action of an acid (for example, an acid-decomposable group formed by a polar group being protected by a dissociative group that is dissociated by the action of an acid, etc.) is preferred. As the photosensitive layer, a known positive photosensitive layer can be applied. In addition, the photosensitive layer can also be a photosensitive light reflecting layer and a photosensitive light absorbing layer. When the photosensitive layer is a photosensitive light reflective layer, the photosensitive layer includes a reflective adjuster, and when the photosensitive layer is a photosensitive light absorbing layer, the photosensitive layer includes a light absorbing substance. The types of the reflective adjuster and the light absorbing substance, and the contents of the reflective adjuster and the light absorbing substance relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer are the same as those in the negative photosensitive layer, and the preferred range is also the same.

作為感光性層的厚度,例如1μm以上為較佳,2μm以上為更佳。作為上限值不受特別限制,例如100μm以下為較佳,50μm以下為更佳。The thickness of the photosensitive layer is, for example, preferably 1 μm or more, and more preferably 2 μm or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 100 μm or less is preferred, and 50 μm or less is more preferred.

(感光性的光反射層及感光性的光吸收層的較佳態樣) 以下,對感光性的光反射層及感光性的光吸收層的各較佳態樣進行說明。 (Preferred forms of photosensitive light reflecting layer and photosensitive light absorbing layer) The following describes the preferred forms of the photosensitive light reflecting layer and the photosensitive light absorbing layer.

・感光性的光反射層 ・・感光性的光反射層的厚度 作為感光性的光反射層的厚度,3μm以上為較佳,5μm以上為更佳,10μm以上為進一步較佳,16μm以上為特佳。作為上限值不受特別限制,例如100μm以下為較佳,50μm以下為更佳。 ・Photosensitive light reflective layer ・・Thickness of photosensitive light reflective layer The thickness of the photosensitive light reflective layer is preferably 3 μm or more, more preferably 5 μm or more, further preferably 10 μm or more, and particularly preferably 16 μm or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 100 μm or less is preferred, and 50 μm or less is more preferred.

・・感光性的光反射層的特性 感光性的光反射層為滿足上述特性X1、特性X2及特性X3中的至少一個之層為較佳。尤其,在發光元件為可見光LED之情況下,作為感光性的光反射層,滿足特性X1及特性X2中的至少一者之層為較佳,在發光元件中的LED為UV-LED之情況下,作為感光性的光反射層,滿足特性X3之層為較佳。 ・・Characteristics of photosensitive light reflective layer The photosensitive light reflective layer is preferably a layer that satisfies at least one of the above characteristics X1, X2, and X3. In particular, when the light-emitting element is a visible light LED, the photosensitive light reflective layer is preferably a layer that satisfies at least one of the characteristics X1 and X2. When the LED in the light-emitting element is a UV-LED. , as a photosensitive light-reflecting layer, a layer satisfying characteristic X3 is preferred.

・感光性的光吸收層 ・・感光性的光吸收層的厚度 作為感光性的光吸收層的厚度,1μm以上為較佳,2μm以上為更佳。作為上限值不受特別限制,例如10μm以下為較佳,5μm以下為更佳。 ・Photosensitive light-absorbing layer ・・Thickness of photosensitive light-absorbing layer The thickness of the photosensitive light-absorbing layer is preferably 1 μm or more, and more preferably 2 μm or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 10 μm or less is preferred, and 5 μm or less is more preferred.

・・感光性的光吸收層的特性 感光性的光吸收層滿足上述特性Y1及/或特性Y2為較佳。尤其,在發光元件為可見光LED之情況下,作為感光性的光吸收層,就外光的反射防止性更優異的觀點而言,滿足特性Y1之層為較佳,在發光元件為UV-LED之情況下,作為感光性的光吸收層,就外光的反射防止性更優異的觀點及雜散光的抑制性更優異的觀點而言,滿足特性Y2之層為較佳。 ・・Characteristics of photosensitive light-absorbing layer The photosensitive light-absorbing layer preferably satisfies the above-mentioned characteristics Y1 and/or characteristics Y2. In particular, when the light-emitting element is a visible light LED, as a photosensitive light-absorbing layer, a layer that satisfies the characteristic Y1 is preferable from the viewpoint of better anti-reflection of external light. When the light-emitting element is a UV-LED In this case, as a photosensitive light-absorbing layer, a layer that satisfies the characteristic Y2 is preferable from the viewpoint of better anti-reflection of external light and better suppression of stray light.

<<保護膜>> 轉印膜可以具有保護膜。 作為保護膜,能夠使用具有耐熱性及耐溶劑性之樹脂膜,例如可舉出聚丙烯膜及聚乙烯膜等聚烯烴膜、聚對酞酸乙二酯膜等聚酯膜、聚碳酸酯膜以及聚苯乙烯膜。 又,作為保護膜可以使用由與上述臨時支撐體相同的材料構成之樹脂膜。 其中,作為保護膜,聚烯烴膜為較佳,聚丙烯膜或聚乙烯膜為更佳,聚乙烯膜為進一步較佳。 <<Protective film>> The transfer film may have a protective film. As the protective film, a resin film having heat resistance and solvent resistance can be used, and examples thereof include polyolefin films such as polypropylene films and polyethylene films, polyester films such as polyethylene terephthalate films, and polycarbonate films. and polystyrene film. In addition, as the protective film, a resin film made of the same material as the temporary support can be used. Among them, as the protective film, a polyolefin film is preferred, a polypropylene film or a polyethylene film is more preferred, and a polyethylene film is further preferred.

保護膜的厚度為1~100μm為較佳,5~50μm為更佳,5~40μm為進一步較佳,15~30μm為特佳。保護膜的厚度能夠藉由基於SEM(掃描式電子顯微鏡:Scanning Electron Microscope)的剖面觀察而測量之任意5個點的平均值來計算。 在機械強度優異的觀點上,保護膜的厚度為1μm以上為較佳,在比較廉價的觀點上,100μm以下為較佳。 The thickness of the protective film is preferably 1 to 100 μm, more preferably 5 to 50 μm, further preferably 5 to 40 μm, and particularly preferably 15 to 30 μm. The thickness of the protective film can be calculated by averaging five arbitrary points measured based on cross-sectional observation with a SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope). From the viewpoint of excellent mechanical strength, the thickness of the protective film is preferably 1 μm or more, and from the viewpoint of relatively low cost, the thickness of the protective film is preferably 100 μm or less.

又,在保護膜中,保護膜中包含之直徑80μm以上的魚眼數為5個/m 2以下為較佳。 另外,“魚眼”係指將材料加熱熔融,並藉由混練、擠壓、雙軸延伸及澆鑄法等方法製造薄膜時,材料的異物、未溶解物及氧化劣化物等被取入薄膜中者。 Furthermore, in the protective film, the number of fisheyes with a diameter of 80 μm or more contained in the protective film is preferably 5/ m2 or less. In addition, "fisheye" refers to foreign matter, undissolved matter, and oxidative degradation products of the material that are taken into the film when the material is heated and melted and the film is manufactured by methods such as kneading, extrusion, biaxial stretching, and casting.

保護膜中包含之直徑3μm以上的粒子的數量為30個/mm 2以下為較佳,10個/mm 2以下為更佳,5個/mm 2以下為進一步較佳。 藉此,能夠抑制由保護膜中包含之粒子引起之凹凸被轉印到感光性層而產生之缺陷。 The number of particles with a diameter of 3 μm or more contained in the protective film is preferably 30 particles/mm 2 or less, more preferably 10 particles/mm 2 or less, and still more preferably 5 particles/mm 2 or less. This can suppress defects caused by the transfer of irregularities caused by particles contained in the protective film to the photosensitive layer.

就賦予捲取性之觀點而言,保護膜的和與感光性層接觸之面相反的一側的表面的算術平均粗糙度Ra為0.01μm以上為較佳,0.02μm以上為更佳,0.03μm以上為進一步較佳。另一方面,小於0.50μm為較佳,0.40μm以下為更佳,0.30μm以下為進一步較佳。 就抑制轉印時的缺陷之觀點而言,保護膜的與感光性層接觸之面的表面粗糙度Ra為0.01μm以上為較佳,0.02μm以上為更佳,0.03μm以上為進一步較佳。另一方面,小於0.50μm為較佳,0.40μm以下為更佳,0.30μm以下為進一步較佳。 From the viewpoint of providing rollability, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the protective film on the side opposite to the surface in contact with the photosensitive layer is preferably 0.01μm or more, more preferably 0.02μm or more, and even more preferably 0.03μm or more. On the other hand, it is preferably less than 0.50μm, more preferably 0.40μm or less, and even more preferably 0.30μm or less. From the viewpoint of suppressing defects during transfer, the surface roughness Ra of the surface in contact with the photosensitive layer of the protective film is preferably 0.01μm or more, more preferably 0.02μm or more, and even more preferably 0.03μm or more. On the other hand, it is preferably less than 0.50μm, more preferably 0.40μm or less, and even more preferably 0.30μm or less.

〔第2實施形態〕 本發明的積層體之製造方法的第2實施形態(以下,亦簡稱為“本發明的第2實施形態”。)具有下述步驟(2-1)~(2-4)。 [Second embodiment] The second embodiment of the method for manufacturing a laminate of the present invention (hereinafter also referred to as "the second embodiment of the present invention") comprises the following steps (2-1) to (2-4).

・步驟(2-1)(貼合步驟):以包括基板和配置於上述基板上之複數個發光元件之帶發光元件之基板的上述發光元件側的表面、與包括臨時支撐體和感光性層之轉印膜的與上述臨時支撐體相反的一側的表面對向且上述發光元件被上述感光性層覆蓋之方式,將上述帶發光元件之基板與上述轉印膜貼合之步驟 ・步驟(2-2)(曝光步驟):對上述感光性層進行圖案曝光之步驟 ・步驟(2-3)(顯影步驟):對曝光後之上述感光性層進行顯影,形成在與上述發光元件對應之位置具有開口部之樹脂圖案之步驟 ・步驟(2-4)(光反射膜形成步驟):在上述開口部的側壁配置光反射膜之步驟 此外,本發明的第2實施形態在步驟(2-1)與步驟(2-2)或步驟(2-2)與步驟(2-3)之間具有以下步驟(2-A)。 ・步驟(2-A)(臨時支撐體剝離步驟):剝離臨時支撐體之步驟。 ・Step (2-1) (bonding step): a step of bonding the substrate with light-emitting elements and the transfer film in such a manner that the surface of the substrate with light-emitting elements on the light-emitting element side of the substrate including a substrate and a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged on the substrate faces the surface of the transfer film including a temporary support and a photosensitive layer on the side opposite to the temporary support and the light-emitting elements are covered by the photosensitive layer ・Step (2-2) (exposure step): a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive layer ・Step (2-3) (development step): a step of developing the exposed photosensitive layer to form a resin pattern having an opening at a position corresponding to the light-emitting element ・Step (2-4) (light-reflecting film forming step): a step of configuring a light-reflecting film on the side wall of the above-mentioned opening In addition, the second embodiment of the present invention has the following step (2-A) between step (2-1) and step (2-2) or step (2-2) and step (2-3). ・Step (2-A) (temporary support body peeling step): a step of peeling off the temporary support body.

<步驟(2-1)~(2-3),(2-A)~(2-C)> 本發明的第2實施形態中的步驟(2-1)~(2-3)、(2-A)分別與作為本發明的第1實施形態中的步驟(1-1)~(1-3)、(1-A)說明者相同。 又,在本發明的第2實施形態中,在實施步驟(2-3)(顯影步驟)之後,亦可以具有對所形成之樹脂圖案進一步進行曝光之步驟(以下,亦稱為“步驟(2-B)”或“後曝光步驟”。)及/或進行加熱之步驟(以下,亦稱為“步驟(2-C)”或“後烘烤步驟”。)。 本發明的第2實施形態中的步驟(2-B)、(2-C)分別與作為本發明的第1實施形態中的步驟(1-B)、(1-C)說明者相同。 <Steps (2-1) to (2-3), (2-A) to (2-C)> Steps (2-1) to (2-3) and (2-A) in the second embodiment of the present invention are the same as those described as steps (1-1) to (1-3) and (1-A) in the first embodiment of the present invention, respectively. In addition, in the second embodiment of the present invention, after implementing step (2-3) (development step), there may be a step of further exposing the formed resin pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as "step (2-B)" or "post-exposure step") and/or a step of heating (hereinafter, also referred to as "step (2-C)" or "post-baking step"). Steps (2-B) and (2-C) in the second embodiment of the present invention are the same as those described as steps (1-B) and (1-C) in the first embodiment of the present invention, respectively.

<步驟(2-4)光反射膜形成步驟> 本發明的第2實施形態為在經過顯影步驟(步驟(2-3))之後(另外,在實施上述步驟(2-B)及/或步驟(2-C)之情況下,在經過該步驟之後),在形成於帶發光元件之基板上之樹脂圖案中的開口部的側壁形成光反射膜之步驟。在作為將發光元件彼此之間相互分隔之隔壁層發揮作用之樹脂圖案中,在光反射膜配置於開口部的側壁之情況下,來自發光元件的光被光反射膜反射,因此亮度更優異。 圖6示出經過光反射膜形成步驟(步驟(2-4))而形成之積層體的剖面示意圖。積層體60由帶發光元件之基板10、樹脂圖案42及配置於樹脂圖案42中的開口部43的側壁之光反射膜62構成。 <Step (2-4) Light reflective film formation step> The second embodiment of the present invention is that after the development step (step (2-3)) (in addition, when the above-mentioned step (2-B) and/or step (2-C) is performed, after the step (2-3)), After), a step of forming a light reflective film on the side wall of the opening in the resin pattern formed on the substrate with the light-emitting element. In the resin pattern that functions as a partition layer that separates light-emitting elements from each other, when the light-reflecting film is disposed on the side wall of the opening, the light from the light-emitting elements is reflected by the light-reflecting film, so the brightness is more excellent. FIG. 6 shows a schematic cross-sectional view of the laminated body formed through the light reflective film forming step (step (2-4)). The laminated body 60 is composed of the substrate 10 with the light-emitting element, the resin pattern 42 , and the light reflective film 62 arranged on the side wall of the opening 43 in the resin pattern 42 .

光反射膜包含金屬為較佳。 作為金屬的種類,不受特別限制,就具有高反射性之觀點而言,銀、鎳、鈷、鐵、銅、鈀、金、鉑、錫、鋅、鋁、鎢或鈦為較佳,銀、金、錫、鎳、鋁或鈷為更佳,就可見光區域中顯示更高的反射性之觀點而言,金、銀或鋁為進一步較佳,銀為特佳。 The light reflective film preferably contains metal. The type of metal is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of high reflectivity, silver, nickel, cobalt, iron, copper, palladium, gold, platinum, tin, zinc, aluminum, tungsten or titanium are preferred. Silver , gold, tin, nickel, aluminum or cobalt are more preferred. From the viewpoint of exhibiting higher reflectivity in the visible light region, gold, silver or aluminum is further preferred, and silver is particularly preferred.

光反射膜形成步驟(步驟(2-4))能夠適用濺射法、蒸鍍法、電鍍法及包含金屬粒子之油墨的印刷(絲網印刷及噴墨等)等。又,亦可以藉由濕式蝕刻及乾式蝕刻等公知的方法,以僅殘留必要的部位之方式進行圖案化而形成。The light reflective film forming step (step (2-4)) can be formed by sputtering, evaporation, electroplating, printing of ink containing metal particles (screen printing, inkjet, etc.), etc. Alternatively, the light reflective film can be formed by patterning in a manner that leaves only necessary areas by known methods such as wet etching and dry etching.

作為光反射膜的膜厚,10nm以上為較佳,50nm以上為更佳,250nm以上為進一步較佳。作為上限值,不受特別限制,例如100μm以下為較佳,50μm以下為更佳,10μm以下為進一步較佳,1μm以下為特佳,800nm以下為最佳。The film thickness of the light reflective film is preferably 10 nm or more, more preferably 50 nm or more, and still more preferably 250 nm or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 100 μm or less is preferred, 50 μm or less is more preferred, 10 μm or less is further preferred, 1 μm or less is particularly preferred, and 800 nm or less is optimal.

光反射膜為滿足以下特性Z1及特性Z2中的至少一者之膜為較佳。在發光元件為可見光LED之情況下,光反射膜滿足特性Z1為較佳,在發光元件為UV-LED之情況下,光反射膜滿足特性Z2為較佳。 (特性Z1) 光反射膜的波長550nm的全反射率為60%以上為較佳,80%以上為更佳。作為上限值,為100%以下。波長550nm的全反射率為在25℃使用分光光度計對厚度30μm的光反射膜進行測量之值。作為分光光度計,例如能夠使用JASCO Corporation製造的分光光度計V-570。 (特性Z2) 光反射膜的波長385nm的全反射率為60%以上為較佳,80%以上為更佳。作為上限值,為100%以下。光反射膜的波長385nm的全反射率為在25℃使用分光光度計對厚度30μm的光反射膜進行測量之值。作為分光光度計,例如能夠使用JASCO Corporation製造的分光光度計V-570。 The light reflective film is preferably a film that satisfies at least one of the following characteristics Z1 and Z2. When the light-emitting element is a visible light LED, the light reflective film preferably satisfies characteristic Z1, and when the light-emitting element is a UV-LED, the light reflective film preferably satisfies characteristic Z2. (Characteristic Z1) The total reflectivity of the light reflective film at a wavelength of 550nm is preferably 60% or more, and more preferably 80% or more. The upper limit is 100% or less. The total reflectivity at a wavelength of 550nm is a value measured at 25°C using a spectrophotometer for a light reflective film with a thickness of 30μm. As a spectrophotometer, for example, a spectrophotometer V-570 manufactured by JASCO Corporation can be used. (Characteristic Z2) The total reflectance of the light reflective film at a wavelength of 385 nm is preferably 60% or more, and more preferably 80% or more. The upper limit is 100% or less. The total reflectance of the light reflective film at a wavelength of 385 nm is a value measured at 25°C using a spectrophotometer for a light reflective film with a thickness of 30 μm. As a spectrophotometer, for example, a spectrophotometer V-570 manufactured by JASCO Corporation can be used.

作為本發明的第2實施形態中能夠使用之轉印膜,例如能夠使用作為本發明的第1實施形態中能夠使用之轉印膜而示出之各種轉印膜。 以下,示出本發明的第2實施形態中能夠使用之轉印膜的較佳態樣的一例。 以下,光反射層前驅物層、光吸收層前驅物層、保護膜及臨時支撐體與本發明的第1實施形態中能夠使用之轉印膜中的光反射層前驅物層、光吸收層前驅物層、保護膜及臨時支撐體的含義相同,較佳態樣亦相同。其他感光性層係指不屬於光反射層前驅物層及光吸收層前驅物層中的任一個之感光性層。 ・(N4)臨時支撐體/光吸收層前驅物層/保護膜 ・(N5)臨時支撐體/光吸收層前驅物層/其他感光性層/保護膜 As the transfer film that can be used in the second embodiment of the present invention, for example, various transfer films shown as the transfer films that can be used in the first embodiment of the present invention can be used. An example of a preferred aspect of the transfer film that can be used in the second embodiment of the present invention is shown below. Hereinafter, the light reflective layer precursor layer, the light absorbing layer precursor layer, the protective film, and the temporary support and the light reflecting layer precursor layer and the light absorbing layer precursor in the transfer film that can be used in the first embodiment of the present invention are described. The physical layer, protective film and temporary support have the same meaning, and the preferred aspects are also the same. Other photosensitive layers refer to photosensitive layers that do not belong to any of the light reflective layer precursor layer and the light absorbing layer precursor layer. ・(N4) Temporary support/light absorbing layer precursor layer/protective film ・(N5) Temporary support/light absorbing layer precursor layer/other photosensitive layers/protective film

另外,在本發明的第2實施形態中使用了轉印膜(N5)之情況下,只要在樹脂圖案的開口部的側壁中,至少在相當於來自於其他感光性層之樹脂層之位置配置光反射膜即可。 [實施例] In addition, when the transfer film (N5) is used in the second embodiment of the present invention, it is only necessary to arrange it at least at a position corresponding to the resin layer from the other photosensitive layer in the side wall of the opening of the resin pattern. Light reflective film is enough. [Example]

以下依據實施例對本發明進行更詳細的說明。以下實施例所示之材料、使用量、比例、處理內容及處理順序等只要不脫離本發明的主旨便能夠適當變更。因此,本發明的範圍不應被以下所示之實施例限定地解釋。 另外,只要沒有特別說明,以下“份”及“%”為質量基準。 The present invention is described in more detail below based on the embodiments. The materials, usage amounts, ratios, processing contents and processing sequences shown in the following embodiments can be appropriately changed as long as they do not deviate from the main purpose of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be interpreted as limited by the embodiments shown below. In addition, unless otherwise specified, the following "parts" and "%" are based on mass.

[光吸收層前驅物層形成用組成物的製備〕 依據表1所示之成分及摻合量製備了光吸收層前驅物層形成用組成物(A-1~A-2)。另外,表1中所示之各成分的摻合量的單位為質量份。 [Preparation of a composition for forming a light absorbing layer precursor layer] A composition for forming a light absorbing layer precursor layer (A-1 to A-2) was prepared according to the components and blending amounts shown in Table 1. In addition, the blending amount of each component shown in Table 1 is expressed in parts by mass.

[表1] 表1:光吸收層前驅物層組成物 各成分 組成物A-1 (摻合量:質量份) 組成物A-2 (摻合量:質量份) 黑前驅物 化合物(1) 16.00 5.26 鹼溶性樹脂 聚合物P-1溶液(固體成分量=40.5質量%) 33.7 44.4 聚合性化合物 1,9-壬二醇二丙烯酸酯 (A-NOD-N,Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造) 6.87 6.87 二新戊四醇六丙烯酸酯 (KAYARAD DPHA,Nippon Kayaku Co.,Ltd.製造) 3.21 3.21 ARONIX TO-2349 (TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.製造) 1.54 1.54 聚合起始劑 2,2’-雙(2-氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基-1,2’-聯咪唑 (Tokyo Chemical Industry Co.,Ltd.製造) 1.87 1.87 增感劑 SB-PI 701(Sanyo Trading Co.,Ltd.製造) 0.016 0.016 鏈轉移劑 N-苯基胺甲醯基甲基-N-羧甲基苯胺 (FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation製造) 0.19 0.19 聚合抑制劑 TDP-G(Kawaguchi Chemical Industry Company, Limited製造) 0.09 0.09 添加劑 MEGAFACE F-551A(DIC Corporation製造) 0.31 0.31 溶劑 丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯 11.6 11.6 甲基乙基酮 24.6 24.6 [Table 1] Table 1: Composition of the light absorbing layer precursor layer Ingredients Composition A-1 (blending amount: parts by mass) Composition A-2 (blending amount: parts by mass) Black foreshadow Compound (1) 16.00 5.26 Alkaline soluble resin Polymer P-1 solution (solid content = 40.5 mass %) 33.7 44.4 Polymeric compounds 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) 6.87 6.87 Dipentatriol hexaacrylate (KAYARAD DPHA, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) 3.21 3.21 ARONIX TO-2349 (manufactured by TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.) 1.54 1.54 Polymerization initiator 2,2'-Bis(2-chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'-biimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) 1.87 1.87 Sensitizer SB-PI 701 (manufactured by Sanyo Trading Co., Ltd.) 0.016 0.016 Chain transfer agent N-Phenylaminomethyl-N-carboxymethylaniline (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation) 0.19 0.19 Polymerization inhibitor TDP-G (manufactured by Kawaguchi Chemical Industry Company, Limited) 0.09 0.09 Additives MEGAFACE F-551A (manufactured by DIC Corporation) 0.31 0.31 Solvent Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 11.6 11.6 Methyl Ethyl Ketone 24.6 24.6

以下,示出表1中的其他縮寫及產品名的詳細情況。 “化合物(1)”:下述結構的化合物。另外,化合物(1)相當於藉由加熱處理從透明向黑色變化之化合物。 Details of other abbreviations and product names in Table 1 are shown below. "Compound (1)": a compound with the following structure. In addition, compound (1) corresponds to a compound that changes from transparent to black by heat treatment.

[化學式22] [Chemical formula 22]

“聚合物P-1溶液”:聚合物P-1〔甲基丙烯酸苄酯/甲基丙烯酸的共聚物、共聚物的組成比(質量基準)=70/30、重量平均分子量(Mw)=5000〕的PGMEA溶液(固體成分量:40.5質量%)。 “ARONIX TO-2349”:含有羧基之單體(TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.製造) ·“SB-PI 701”:4,4’-雙(二乙基胺基)二苯甲酮(Sanyo Trading Co.,Ltd.製造) “TDP-G”:啡噻𠯤(Kawaguchi Chemical Industry Company, Limited製造) “MEGAFACE F551A”:氟系界面活性劑(DIC Corporation製造) "Polymer P-1 solution": Polymer P-1 [copolymer of benzyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid, composition ratio of the copolymer (mass basis) = 70/30, weight average molecular weight (Mw) = 5000 〕 PGMEA solution (solid content: 40.5 mass%). "ARONIX TO-2349": Carboxyl group-containing monomer (manufactured by TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.) · “SB-PI 701”: 4,4’-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone (manufactured by Sanyo Trading Co., Ltd.) "TDP-G": TDP-G (manufactured by Kawaguchi Chemical Industry Company, Limited) "MEGAFACE F551A": Fluorine-based surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation)

[光反射層前驅物層形成用組成物(B-1)及感光性組成物(B-2)的製備〕 依據表2所示之成分及摻合量,製備了光反射層前驅物層形成用組成物(B-1)及感光性組成物(B-2)。另外,表2中所示之各成分的摻合量的單位為質量份。 [Preparation of the composition (B-1) and the photosensitive composition (B-2) for forming the light reflective layer precursor layer] Based on the components and blending amounts shown in Table 2, the composition (B-1) for forming the light reflective layer precursor layer and the photosensitive composition (B-2) were prepared. In addition, the unit of the blending amount of each component shown in Table 2 is parts by mass.

[表2] 表2:光反射層前驅物層組成物(B-1)、其他感光性組成物(B-2) 各成分 組成物B-1 (摻合量:質量份) 組成物B-2 (摻合量:質量份) 白色顏料分散液 白色分散液 (顏料濃度:金紅石型氧化鈦,顏料濃度30質量%,Tokyo Printing Ink Mfg. Co., Ltd.製造) 51.9 - 鹼溶性樹脂 聚合物P-2溶液(固體成分量:36.2質量%) 19.80 43.30 聚合性化合物 A-NOD-N(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造) 3.05 6.68 A-DPH(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造) 1.43 3.12 ARONIX TO-2349(TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.製造) 0.54 1.20 聚合起始劑 B-CIM(Hampford公司製造) 0.83 1.82 增感劑 SB-PI 701(Sanyo Trading Co.,Ltd.製造) 0.01 0.01 鏈轉移劑 N-苯基胺甲醯基甲基-N-羧甲基苯胺 (FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation製造) 0.16 0.16 聚合抑制劑 TDP-G(Kawaguchi Chemical Industry Company, Limited製造) 0.08 0.08 添加劑 CBT-1(Johoku Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造) 0.03 0.03 4-羥甲基-4-甲基-1-苯基-3-吡唑烷酮 (FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation製造) 0.01 0.01 MEGAFACE F-551A(DIC Corporation製造) 0.26 0.26 溶劑 丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯 5.89 27.33 甲基乙基酮 16.00 16.00 [Table 2] Table 2: Light reflective layer front driver layer composition (B-1), other photosensitive composition (B-2) Ingredients Composition B-1 (blending amount: parts by mass) Composition B-2 (blending amount: parts by mass) White pigment dispersion White dispersion (Pigment concentration: rutile titanium oxide, pigment concentration 30 mass%, manufactured by Tokyo Printing Ink Mfg. Co., Ltd.) 51.9 - Alkaline soluble resin Polymer P-2 solution (solid content: 36.2 mass %) 19.80 43.30 Polymeric compounds A-NOD-N (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) 3.05 6.68 A-DPH (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) 1.43 3.12 ARONIX TO-2349 (manufactured by TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.) 0.54 1.20 Polymerization initiator B-CIM (manufactured by Hampford) 0.83 1.82 Sensitizer SB-PI 701 (manufactured by Sanyo Trading Co., Ltd.) 0.01 0.01 Chain transfer agent N-Phenylaminomethyl-N-carboxymethylaniline (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation) 0.16 0.16 Polymerization inhibitor TDP-G (manufactured by Kawaguchi Chemical Industry Company, Limited) 0.08 0.08 Additives CBT-1 (manufactured by Johoku Chemical Co., Ltd.) 0.03 0.03 4-Hydroxymethyl-4-methyl-1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidinone (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation) 0.01 0.01 MEGAFACE F-551A (manufactured by DIC Corporation) 0.26 0.26 Solvent Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 5.89 27.33 Methyl Ethyl Ketone 16.00 16.00

〔P-2溶液(聚合物P-2的固體成分36.2質量%溶液)的製備方法〕 藉由下述所示之聚合步驟及加成步驟準備了P-2溶液(聚合物P-2的固體成分36.2質量%溶液)。 將丙二醇單甲醚113.5g裝入燒瓶中並在氮氣流下加熱至90℃。將苯乙烯172g、甲基丙烯酸甲酯4.7g及甲基丙烯酸112.1g溶解於丙二醇單甲醚30g而得之溶液、以及將聚合起始劑V-601(FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation製造)27.6g溶解於丙二醇單甲醚57.7g而得之溶液經3小時同時滴加到該溶液中。滴加結束後,每隔1小時添加了3次2.5g的V-601。然後,使其進一步反應3小時。然後,用丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯160.7g及丙二醇單甲醚233.3g進行了稀釋。在空氣氣流下,將反應液升溫至100℃,並添加了四乙基溴化銨1.8g及對甲氧基苯酚0.86g。向其中經20分鐘滴加了甲基丙烯酸環氧丙酯(NOF CORPORATION製Brenmar G)71.9g。滴加後,使反應液在100℃反應7小時,得到了樹脂P-2的溶液。所得到之溶液的固體成分濃度為36.2質量%。GPC中的標準聚苯乙烯換算的重量平均分子量為18000,數量平均分子量為7800,分散度為2.3,聚合物的酸值為124mgKOH/g。使用氣相層析法進行測量之殘留單體量在任何單體中,相對於聚合物固體成分均小於0.1質量%。以下示出聚合物P-2的結構。 [Preparation method of P-2 solution (solid content of polymer P-2 36.2 mass % solution)] The P-2 solution (solid content of polymer P-2 36.2 mass % solution) was prepared by the polymerization step and addition step shown below. 113.5 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether was placed in a flask and heated to 90°C under a nitrogen flow. A solution obtained by dissolving 172 g of styrene, 4.7 g of methyl methacrylate and 112.1 g of methacrylic acid in 30 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether and a solution obtained by dissolving 27.6 g of polymerization initiator V-601 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Wako Pure Chemical Corporation) in 57.7 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether were simultaneously added dropwise to the solution over 3 hours. After the addition was completed, 2.5 g of V-601 was added three times at intervals of 1 hour. Then, it was allowed to react for a further 3 hours. Then, it was diluted with 160.7 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and 233.3 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether. Under air flow, the reaction solution was heated to 100°C, and 1.8 g of tetraethylammonium bromide and 0.86 g of p-methoxyphenol were added. 71.9 g of glycidyl methacrylate (Brenmar G manufactured by NOF CORPORATION) was added dropwise over 20 minutes. After the addition, the reaction solution was reacted at 100°C for 7 hours to obtain a solution of resin P-2. The solid content concentration of the obtained solution was 36.2% by mass. The weight average molecular weight converted to standard polystyrene in GPC was 18,000, the number average molecular weight was 7,800, the dispersity was 2.3, and the acid value of the polymer was 124 mgKOH/g. The amount of residual monomers measured by gas chromatography was less than 0.1 mass % relative to the polymer solid content in any monomer. The structure of polymer P-2 is shown below.

聚合物P-2:下述結構式中的構成單元的組成表示莫耳比。 另外,聚合物P-2相當於鹼溶性樹脂。 Polymer P-2: The composition of the constituent units in the following structural formula represents the molar ratio. In addition, polymer P-2 is equivalent to an alkali-soluble resin.

[化學式23] [Chemical formula 23]

以下,示出表2中的其他成分的縮寫及產品名的詳細情況。 “A-NOD-N”:1,9-壬二醇二丙烯酸酯(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造) “A-DPH”:二新戊四醇六丙烯酸酯(Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造) “ARONIX TO-2349”:含有羧基之單體(TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.製造) “B-CIM”:2,2’-雙(2-氯苯基)-4,4’,5,5’-四苯基-1,2’-聯咪唑(Hampford公司製造) ·“SB-PI 701”:4,4’-雙(二乙基胺基)二苯甲酮(Sanyo Trading Co.,Ltd.製造) “TDP-G”:啡噻𠯤(Kawaguchi Chemical Industry Company, Limited製造) “CBT-1”:羧基苯并三唑(Johoku Chemical Co.,Ltd.製造) “MEGAFACE F551A”:氟系界面活性劑(DIC Corporation製造) The details of the abbreviations and product names of other components in Table 2 are shown below. "A-NOD-N": 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) "A-DPH": dipenterythritol hexaacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) "ARONIX TO-2349": Carboxyl group-containing monomer (manufactured by TOAGOSEI CO., LTD.) “B-CIM”: 2,2’-bis(2-chlorophenyl)-4,4’,5,5’-tetraphenyl-1,2’-biimidazole (manufactured by Hampford Corporation) · “SB-PI 701”: 4,4’-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone (manufactured by Sanyo Trading Co., Ltd.) "TDP-G": TDP-G (manufactured by Kawaguchi Chemical Industry Company, Limited) "CBT-1": Carboxybenzotriazole (manufactured by Johoku Chemical Co., Ltd.) "MEGAFACE F551A": Fluorine-based surfactant (manufactured by DIC Corporation)

[實施例1] 〔轉印膜的製作〕 作為臨時支撐體,準備了聚對酞酸乙二酯膜(Lumirror 16KS40,TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC.製造,厚度:16μm)。在臨時支撐體上,以乾燥後的厚度成為3μm之方式塗佈光吸收層前驅物層形成用組成物A-1,在100℃乾燥1分鐘,藉此形成了光吸收層前驅物層。在光吸收層前驅物層上,以乾燥後的厚度成為30μm之方式塗佈光反射層前驅物層形成用組成物B-1,在100℃乾燥3分鐘,藉此形成了光反射層前驅物層。將聚對酞酸乙二酯膜(Lumirror 16KS40,TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC.製造,厚度:16μm)壓接於光反射層前驅物層上。藉由以上順序,得到了依序包括臨時支撐體、光吸收層前驅物層、光反射層前驅物層及保護膜之轉印膜1。 [Example 1] 〔Preparation of transfer film〕 As a temporary support, a polyethylene terephthalate film (Lumirror 16KS40, manufactured by TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC., thickness: 16 μm) was prepared. On the temporary support, the light absorbing layer pre-driver layer forming composition A-1 was applied in a manner that the thickness after drying was 3 μm, and dried at 100°C for 1 minute, thereby forming a light absorbing layer pre-driver layer. On the light absorbing layer pre-driver layer, the light reflecting layer pre-driver layer forming composition B-1 was applied in a manner that the thickness after drying was 30 μm, and dried at 100°C for 3 minutes, thereby forming a light reflecting layer pre-driver layer. A polyethylene terephthalate film (Lumirror 16KS40, manufactured by TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC., thickness: 16μm) was pressed onto the light-reflecting layer front-driver layer. By the above sequence, a transfer film 1 including a temporary support, a light-absorbing layer front-driver layer, a light-reflecting layer front-driver layer and a protective film was obtained in sequence.

〔微LED顯示元件的製作〕 按照以下順序,使用轉印膜1製作了微LED顯示元件。具體而言,在將LED晶片接合於陣列基板上的接合構件之後,使用轉印膜1形成了樹脂圖案(隔壁層)。以下示出具體的順序。 [Production of micro LED display element] A micro LED display element was produced using the transfer film 1 in the following procedure. Specifically, after the LED chip was bonded to the bonding member on the array substrate, a resin pattern (partition layer) was formed using the transfer film 1. The specific procedure is shown below.

[[LED晶片的安裝〕〕 首先,按照日本特開2021-163945號公報(尤其請求項、0013~0041段)中記載之方法,將剝離用藍寶石基板上的200個LED晶片一起接合於陣列基板上,剝離了剝離用藍寶石基板。 [[Installation of LED chips]] First, according to the method described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-163945 (Special Claims, Paragraphs 0013 to 0041), 200 LED chips on the peeling sapphire substrate were jointly bonded to the array substrate, and the peeling sapphire substrate was peeled off .

[[樹脂圖案(隔壁層)的形成]] 接著,剝離轉印膜1的保護膜,在以下所示之層壓條件下,將轉印膜1貼合於接合有LED晶片之陣列基板上,製作了在帶發光元件之基板(帶晶片之基板)上依序積層光反射層前驅物層、光吸收層前驅物層及臨時支撐體而成之帶前驅物層之基板。 帶晶片之基板的加熱溫度:40℃ 橡膠輥的溫度:110℃ 線壓:3N/cm 輸送速度:2m/分鐘 [[Formation of resin pattern (next wall layer)]] Next, the protective film of the transfer film 1 was peeled off, and the transfer film 1 was attached to the array substrate with the LED chip under the lamination conditions shown below, and a substrate with a pre-driver layer was prepared by laminating a light-reflecting layer pre-driver layer, a light-absorbing layer pre-driver layer and a temporary support body in sequence on the substrate with light-emitting elements (substrate with chip). Heating temperature of substrate with chip: 40°C Temperature of rubber roller: 110°C Line pressure: 3N/cm Transport speed: 2m/min

將曝光遮罩(具有開口部形成用圖案之遮罩)的表面與臨時支撐體的表面之間的距離設定為125μm。使用具有超高壓水銀燈之接近式曝光機(Hitachi High-Tech Corporation),隔著臨時支撐體對光反射層前驅物層及光吸收層前驅物層以100mJ/cm 2的曝光量並以圖案狀照射了i射線。此時,調整曝光遮罩的圖案及位置,以使在安裝有LED晶片之部分形成隔壁層的錐角度(參照圖3的錐角度θ)成為表3所示之角度之開口部形成。 在曝光處理後剝離臨時支撐體之後,使用溫度32℃的碳酸鈉1質量%水溶液,對曝光後的光反射層前驅物層及光吸收層前驅物層進行60秒鐘顯影處理。接著,從超高壓洗滌噴嘴向顯影處理後得到之積層體噴射超純水,藉此去除殘渣,然後進一步吹氣,從而去除水分。 接著,對於所得到之積層體中的圖案,使用具有高壓水銀燈之後曝光機(USHIO INC.製造),以曝光量1000mJ/cm 2(i射線)實施了曝光處理(後曝光)。曝光後,在210℃實施了5分鐘的後烘烤處理。 按照上述順序,在陣列基板上形成了在LED晶片的位置具有開口部之樹脂圖案(以光反射層及光吸收層的順序積層之隔壁層)。 The distance between the surface of the exposure mask (a mask having an opening forming pattern) and the surface of the temporary support was set to 125 μm. Using a proximity exposure machine (Hitachi High-Tech Corporation) equipped with an ultra-high-pressure mercury lamp, the light-reflecting layer precursor layer and the light-absorbing layer precursor layer were irradiated in a pattern with an exposure dose of 100 mJ/cm 2 through the temporary support. The i-ray. At this time, the pattern and position of the exposure mask are adjusted so that the taper angle (refer to the taper angle θ in Figure 3) of the partition layer formed in the portion where the LED chip is mounted becomes the angle shown in Table 3. The opening is formed. After the temporary support was peeled off after the exposure process, the exposed light reflective layer precursor layer and the light absorbing layer precursor layer were developed for 60 seconds using a 1 mass % sodium carbonate aqueous solution at a temperature of 32°C. Next, ultrapure water is sprayed from an ultrahigh-pressure washing nozzle to the laminated body obtained after the development process to remove residues, and then air is further blown to remove moisture. Next, the pattern in the obtained laminated body was subjected to exposure processing (post-exposure) at an exposure dose of 1000 mJ/cm 2 (i-ray) using a post-exposure machine (manufactured by USHIO INC.) with a high-pressure mercury lamp. After exposure, a post-baking process was performed at 210° C. for 5 minutes. According to the above procedure, a resin pattern (a barrier layer layer in which a light reflection layer and a light absorption layer are stacked in this order) having an opening at the position of the LED chip is formed on the array substrate.

如此,製作了微LED顯示元件。In this way, a micro LED display element was manufactured.

[實施例2] 〔實施例的轉印膜的製作〕 作為臨時支撐體,準備了聚對酞酸乙二酯膜(Lumirror 16KS40,TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC.製造,厚度:16μm)。在臨時支撐體上,以乾燥後的厚度成為3μm之方式塗佈光吸收層前驅物層形成用組成物A-1,在100℃乾燥1分鐘,藉此形成了光吸收層前驅物層。在光吸收層前驅物層上,以乾燥後的厚度成為30μm之方式塗佈感光性層形成用組成物B-2,在100℃乾燥3分鐘從而形成了感光性層(其他感光性層)。將聚對酞酸乙二酯膜(Lumirror 16KS40,TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC.製造,厚度:16μm)壓接於感光性層上。藉由以上順序,得到了依序包括臨時支撐體、光吸收層前驅物層、感光性層及保護膜之轉印膜2。 [Example 2] 〔Preparation of transfer film of Example〕 As a temporary support, a polyethylene terephthalate film (Lumirror 16KS40, manufactured by TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC., thickness: 16μm) was prepared. On the temporary support, the light absorbing layer precursor layer forming composition A-1 was applied in a manner to have a thickness of 3μm after drying, and dried at 100°C for 1 minute to form a light absorbing layer precursor layer. On the light absorbing layer precursor layer, the photosensitive layer forming composition B-2 was applied in a manner to have a thickness of 30μm after drying, and dried at 100°C for 3 minutes to form a photosensitive layer (other photosensitive layer). A polyethylene terephthalate film (Lumirror 16KS40, manufactured by TORAY INDUSTRIES, INC., thickness: 16μm) was pressed onto the photosensitive layer. Through the above sequence, a transfer film 2 including a temporary support, a light absorbing layer precursor layer, a photosensitive layer and a protective film was obtained in sequence.

〔實施例2的微LED顯示元件的製作〕 首先,以與實施例1的〔〔LED晶片的安裝〕〕同樣地,在陣列基板上安裝了LED晶片。 接著,以成為表3所示之隔壁層的錐角度之方式適當調整程序條件,除此以外,按照與上述實施例1中的〔〔樹脂圖案(隔壁層)的形成〕〕相同的順序,在安裝有LED晶片之陣列基板上形成了具有開口部之樹脂圖案(按照樹脂層及光吸收層的順序積層而成之隔壁層)。 在製作隔壁之後,藉由公知的蒸鍍法在隔壁的開口部蒸鍍300nm的銀層。此時,藉由遮蔽晶片上及對應於隔壁層的與基板側相反的一側的表面之位置,僅在隔壁層的開口部的側面形成了光反射層。如此,製作了實施例2的微LED顯示元件。 [Preparation of micro LED display element of Example 2] First, LED chips were mounted on the array substrate in the same manner as [[Mounting of LED chips]] of Example 1. Then, the process conditions were appropriately adjusted so as to obtain the tapered angle of the partition layer shown in Table 3. In addition, a resin pattern having an opening (a partition layer formed by stacking a resin layer and a light absorbing layer in this order) was formed on the array substrate on which the LED chips were mounted in accordance with the same sequence as [[Formation of resin pattern (partition layer)]] in Example 1 above. After the partition was prepared, a 300nm silver layer was evaporated on the opening of the partition by a known evaporation method. At this time, by shielding the position of the surface on the chip and the side opposite to the substrate side corresponding to the partition layer, a light reflection layer is formed only on the side of the opening of the partition layer. In this way, the micro LED display element of Example 2 is manufactured.

〔實施例3〕 使用A-2作為光吸收層前驅物層組成物以乾燥後的厚度成為30μm之方式進行塗佈,設為不積層光反射層前驅物層之結構,除此以外與實施例1同樣地得到了轉印膜3。 [Example 3] A-2 was used as the light absorbing layer front-driver layer composition and coated in a manner such that the thickness after drying was 30 μm, and a structure in which the light reflecting layer front-driver layer was not laminated was adopted. Transfer film 3 was obtained in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the structure was such that the light reflecting layer front-driver layer was not laminated.

〔實施例3的微LED顯示元件的製作〕 首先,以與實施例1的〔〔LED晶片的安裝〕〕同樣地,在陣列基板上安裝了LED晶片。 接著,以成為表3所示之隔壁層的錐角度之方式適當調整程序條件,除此以外,按照與上述實施例1中的〔〔樹脂圖案(隔壁層)的形成〕〕相同的順序,在帶晶片之陣列基板上形成了具有開口部之樹脂圖案(光吸收層)。 [Production of micro-LED display element of Example 3] First, the LED chip was mounted on the array substrate in the same manner as [Mounting of LED Chip] in Example 1. Next, the process conditions were appropriately adjusted so as to obtain the taper angle of the partition wall layer shown in Table 3. The same procedure as [Formation of the Resin Pattern (Partition Wall Layer)] in Example 1 was followed. A resin pattern (light absorbing layer) having openings is formed on the array substrate with the chip.

〔比較例1的微LED顯示元件的製作〕 除不形成隔壁層以外,與實施例1同樣地製作了比較例1的微LED顯示元件。 [Preparation of micro LED display element of comparative example 1] The micro LED display element of comparative example 1 was prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the partition layer was not formed.

如上所述,在所製作之各微LED的元件中,LED晶片的尺寸為20μm見方,厚度為8μm。又,排列LED晶片之間距為400μm,通孔尺寸為30μm見方,LED晶片之間的隔壁寬度為370μm。As mentioned above, in each micro-LED component produced, the size of the LED chip is 20 μm square and the thickness is 8 μm. In addition, the pitch between the LED chips was 400 μm, the through hole size was 30 μm square, and the partition width between the LED chips was 370 μm.

(對相鄰像素的光滲出評價) 使用如上所述製作之微LED顯示元件,進行了對相鄰像素的光滲出的評價。使用顯微紫外可見近紅外分光光度計MSV-5500(JASCO Corporation製造),在發光中心波長為530nm的綠色像素發光時的相鄰之像素的位置,測量了530nm的光強度。此時,按照以下基準評價了將發光像素中的530nm的光強度設為100%時的相鄰像素的530nm光強度。 (評價基準) “A”:相鄰像素中的光強度小於0.1% “B”:相鄰像素中的光強度為0.1%以上且小於1% “C”:相鄰像素中的光強度為1%以上 (Evaluation of light bleeding from adjacent pixels) Using the micro-LED display element fabricated as described above, the light bleeding of adjacent pixels was evaluated. Using a micro-UV-visible-near-infrared spectrophotometer MSV-5500 (manufactured by JASCO Corporation), the light intensity at 530 nm was measured at the position of an adjacent pixel when a green pixel with an emission center wavelength of 530 nm emitted light. At this time, the 530 nm light intensity of adjacent pixels when the 530 nm light intensity in the light emitting pixel was set to 100% was evaluated based on the following criteria. (Evaluation criteria) "A": Light intensity in adjacent pixels is less than 0.1% "B": The light intensity in adjacent pixels is more than 0.1% and less than 1% "C": The light intensity in adjacent pixels is more than 1%

將各實施例的評價結果示於表3。The evaluation results of each embodiment are shown in Table 3.

[表3] 表3 積層體之 製造方法 轉印膜的結構 隔壁的錐角度(微LED顯示元件的製造條件) 有無對隔壁的錐部的銀蒸鍍 對相鄰像素的光滲出評價 光吸收層 前驅物層 光反射層 前驅物層 其他感光性層 組成物的種類 厚度 組成物的種類 厚度 組成物的種類 厚度 實施例1 有形成樹脂圖案 (隔壁層) A-1 3μm B-1 30μm - - 60° A 實施例2 有形成樹脂圖案 (隔壁層) A-1 3μm - - B-2 30μm 60° A 實施例3 有形成樹脂圖案 (隔壁層) A-2 30μm - - - - 90° A 比較例1 沒有形成樹脂圖案 (隔壁層) (僅發光元件) - - - - - - - - C [table 3] table 3 Method for manufacturing a laminate Transfer film structure Taper angle of the adjacent wall (manufacturing conditions of micro-LED display components) Is there silver deposition on the adjacent tapered part? Evaluation of light leakage from neighboring pixels Light absorbing layer precursor layer Light reflecting layer before driving material layer Other photosensitive layers Type of composition thickness Type of composition thickness Type of composition thickness Embodiment 1 Formed resin pattern (next layer) A-1 3μm B-1 30μm - - 60° without A Embodiment 2 Formed resin pattern (next layer) A-1 3μm - - B-2 30μm 60° have A Embodiment 3 Formed resin pattern (next layer) A-2 30μm - - - - 90° without A Comparison Example 1 No resin pattern (partition layer) is formed (light-emitting element only) - - - - - - - - C

由表3的結果可知,包括藉由實施例的積層體之製造方法得到之複數個發光元件之積層體抑制了來自相鄰之發光元件的漏光。 另一方面可知,包括藉由比較例1的積層體之製造方法得到之複數個發光元件之積層體得不到上述效果。 又,確認到藉由實施例1及2的積層體之製造方法得到之積層體與實施例1及比較例1相比,在發光元件點亮時能夠進行更高亮度的顯示。 It can be seen from the results in Table 3 that the laminated body including the plurality of light-emitting elements obtained by the method of manufacturing the laminated body of the Example suppresses light leakage from adjacent light-emitting elements. On the other hand, it was found that a laminate including a plurality of light-emitting elements obtained by the method of manufacturing a laminate of Comparative Example 1 does not achieve the above-mentioned effect. Moreover, it was confirmed that the laminated body obtained by the manufacturing method of the laminated body of Examples 1 and 2 can perform the display of higher brightness when a light-emitting element is turned on, compared with Example 1 and Comparative Example 1.

〔比較例2的微LED顯示元件的製作〕 在連接LED晶片之前的陣列基板上,使用轉印膜1預先形成隔壁結構之後,將LED晶片安裝於基板上,由此製作了微LED顯示元件。 此時,由於陣列基板具有33μm厚度的隔壁結構,因此如實施例1的〔〔LED晶片的安裝〕〕那樣,難以將複數個微LED晶片一起安裝於陣列基板上,因此藉由反覆進行將LED晶片逐個接合於連接部、從剝離用藍寶石基板剝離,從而製作了微LED顯示元件。 其結果,在比較例2中,與實施例1~3中的任一個相比,製造微LED顯示元件耗費了100倍以上的時間。 [Production of micro LED display element in Comparative Example 2] After forming a partition wall structure in advance using transfer film 1 on the array substrate before connecting the LED chip, the LED chip was mounted on the substrate, thereby producing a micro LED display element. At this time, since the array substrate has a partition wall structure with a thickness of 33 μm, it is difficult to mount a plurality of micro LED chips on the array substrate together as in [[Mounting of LED chip]] of Example 1, so the micro LED display element was produced by repeatedly bonding the LED chips one by one to the connection part and peeling them off from the peeling sapphire substrate. As a result, in Comparative Example 2, it took more than 100 times as long to produce the micro LED display element as compared with any of Examples 1 to 3.

10:帶發光元件之基板 12:基板 12A:基板面 T1:發光元件的高度 14:發光元件 20、20A、20B:轉印膜 22:臨時支撐體 24:感光性層 26:光吸收層前驅物層 28:光反射層前驅物層 30:遮罩 40、60:積層體 42:樹脂圖案 44:開口部 50:保護膜 62:光反射膜 θ:錐角度 10: Substrate with light-emitting element 12: Substrate 12A: Substrate surface T1: Height of light-emitting element 14: Light-emitting element 20, 20A, 20B: Transfer film 22: Temporary support 24: Photosensitive layer 26: Light-absorbing layer front-driver layer 28: Light-reflecting layer front-driver layer 30: Mask 40, 60: Laminated body 42: Resin pattern 44: Opening 50: Protective film 62: Light-reflecting film θ: Taper angle

圖1係用於說明步驟(1-1)的示意圖。 圖2係用於說明步驟(1-2)的示意圖。 圖3係用於說明步驟(1-3)的示意圖。 圖4係用於說明轉印膜的結構的示意圖。 圖5係用於說明轉印膜的結構的示意圖。 圖6係用於說明步驟(2-4)的示意圖。 Figure 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining step (1-1). Figure 2 is a schematic diagram for explaining step (1-2). Figure 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining step (1-3). FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining the structure of the transfer film. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram for explaining the structure of the transfer film. Figure 6 is a schematic diagram for explaining step (2-4).

10:帶發光元件之基板 10: Substrate with light-emitting element

12:基板 12:Substrate

12A:基板表面 12A: Substrate surface

14:發光元件 14:Light-emitting components

T1:發光元件的厚度 T1: Thickness of light-emitting element

20:轉印膜 20:Transfer film

22:臨時支撐體 22: Temporary support body

24:感光性層 24: Photosensitive layer

Claims (11)

一種積層體之製造方法,其具有: 以包括基板和配置於前述基板上之複數個發光元件之帶發光元件之基板的前述發光元件側的表面、與包括臨時支撐體和感光性層之轉印膜的與前述臨時支撐體相反的一側的表面對向且前述發光元件被前述感光性層覆蓋之方式,將前述帶發光元件之基板與前述轉印膜貼合之步驟1; 對前述感光性層進行圖案曝光之步驟2;及 對曝光後之前述感光性層進行顯影,形成在與前述發光元件對應之位置具有開口部之樹脂圖案之步驟3, 在前述步驟1與前述步驟2之間或前述步驟2與前述步驟3之間具有剝離前述臨時支撐體之步驟。 A method for manufacturing a laminated body, which has: A surface of a light-emitting element side of a substrate with a light-emitting element including a substrate and a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged on the substrate, and a transfer film including a temporary support and a photosensitive layer opposite to the temporary support Step 1 of laminating the substrate with the light-emitting element and the transfer film in such a manner that the surfaces of the two sides face each other and the light-emitting element is covered by the photosensitive layer; Step 2 of performing pattern exposure on the aforementioned photosensitive layer; and Step 3 of developing the aforementioned photosensitive layer after exposure to form a resin pattern having openings at positions corresponding to the aforementioned light-emitting elements, There is a step of peeling off the temporary support between the aforementioned step 1 and the aforementioned step 2 or between the aforementioned step 2 and the aforementioned step 3. 如請求項1所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 前述轉印膜中的前述感光性層的膜厚大於前述發光元件的高度。 A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in claim 1, wherein the thickness of the photosensitive layer in the transfer film is greater than the height of the light-emitting element. 如請求項1或請求項2所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 前述轉印膜中的前述感光性層包含鹼溶樹脂、聚合性化合物及光聚合起始劑。 A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in claim 1 or claim 2, wherein the photosensitive layer in the transfer film comprises an alkali-soluble resin, a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator. 如請求項1或請求項2所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 前述轉印膜中的前述感光性層包含聚合物及光酸產生劑。 A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in claim 1 or claim 2, wherein the photosensitive layer in the transfer film comprises a polymer and a photoacid generator. 如請求項1或請求項2所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 在前述轉印膜中的前述感光性層中,相對於前述感光性層的總質量,水的含量為5.0質量%以下。 The manufacturing method of the laminated body according to Claim 1 or Claim 2, wherein The content of water in the photosensitive layer in the transfer film is 5.0 mass % or less based on the total mass of the photosensitive layer. 如請求項1或請求項2所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 在前述轉印膜中的前述感光性層中,相對於前述感光性層的總質量,有機溶劑的含量為5.0質量%以下。 A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in claim 1 or claim 2, wherein in the photosensitive layer in the transfer film, the content of the organic solvent is 5.0 mass % or less relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. 如請求項1或請求項2所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 在前述轉印膜中的前述感光性層中,相對於前述感光性層的總質量,氯化物離子的含量為100質量ppm以下。 A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in claim 1 or claim 2, wherein in the photosensitive layer in the transfer film, the content of chloride ions is 100 mass ppm or less relative to the total mass of the photosensitive layer. 如請求項1或請求項2所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 前述轉印膜中的前述感光性層包含白色顏料。 A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in claim 1 or claim 2, wherein the photosensitive layer in the transfer film contains a white pigment. 如請求項1或請求項2所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 前述轉印膜中的前述感光性層從前述臨時支撐體側起依序具有感光性的光吸收層前驅物層和感光性的光反射性層前驅物層。 A method for manufacturing a laminate as described in claim 1 or claim 2, wherein the photosensitive layer in the transfer film has a photosensitive light absorbing layer precursor layer and a photosensitive light reflecting layer precursor layer in order from the side of the temporary support body. 如請求項1或請求項2所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 前述轉印膜中的前述感光性層為感光性的光吸收層前驅物層。 The manufacturing method of the laminated body according to Claim 1 or Claim 2, wherein The photosensitive layer in the transfer film is a photosensitive light-absorbing layer precursor layer. 如請求項1或請求項2所述之積層體之製造方法,其中 在前述步驟3之後,還具有在前述開口部的側壁配置光反射膜之步驟4。 The manufacturing method of the laminated body according to Claim 1 or Claim 2, wherein After the aforementioned step 3, there is also a step 4 of arranging a light reflective film on the side wall of the opening.
TW112128263A 2022-07-29 2023-07-28 Method for manufacturing laminate film TW202410492A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022-122020 2022-07-29
JP2022122020 2022-07-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202410492A true TW202410492A (en) 2024-03-01

Family

ID=89706494

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW112128263A TW202410492A (en) 2022-07-29 2023-07-28 Method for manufacturing laminate film

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TW202410492A (en)
WO (1) WO2024024842A1 (en)

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4694157B2 (en) * 2004-06-28 2011-06-08 富士フイルム株式会社 Substrate with light-shielding image, method for producing light-shielding image, transfer material, color filter, and display device
JP2010009913A (en) * 2008-06-26 2010-01-14 Asahi Kasei E-Materials Corp Photopolymerizable resin laminate, and method of manufacturing pattern using the same
JP2019179111A (en) * 2018-03-30 2019-10-17 Jsr株式会社 Display element laminate and partition forming composition
JP2023021603A (en) * 2021-08-02 2023-02-14 株式会社レゾナック Substrate for color conversion device formation, photosensitive film, color conversion device, and display device
JPWO2023127889A1 (en) * 2021-12-28 2023-07-06

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2024024842A1 (en) 2024-02-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI695224B (en) Photosensitive composition, method for manufacturing cured film, method for manufacturing liquid crystal display device, method for manufacturing organic electroluminescence display device, and method for manufacturing touch panel
WO2023127889A1 (en) Transfer film, laminate manufacturing method, laminate, and micro-led display element
TW201938693A (en) Structure, composition for near-infrared cut filter, dry film, method for manufacturing structure, light sensor, and image display device
KR102517695B1 (en) Photosensitive composition, cured film and method for producing same, display device, light emitting element, and light receiving element
WO2022196537A1 (en) Laminate and method for manufacturing same
TW202305020A (en) Touch panel sensor and manufacturing method of touch panel sensor
CN115519871A (en) Transfer film, laminate, acoustic speaker, and method for manufacturing laminate
JP7514305B2 (en) Method for manufacturing transfer film and laminate
JP7376617B2 (en) Color filter, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state image sensor and display device
JP7213981B2 (en) Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing touch panel
WO2021187557A1 (en) Photosensitive material, transfer film, method for producing circuit wiring, method for producing touch panel, pattern formation method
TW202410492A (en) Method for manufacturing laminate film
CN115668057A (en) Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and blocked isocyanate compound
KR20220044580A (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter and display device
WO2022209307A1 (en) Multilayer body and method for producing multilayer body
US20220404526A1 (en) Transfer film, base material for display panel, manufacturing method of base material for display panel, and display panel
CN118451369A (en) Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and micro-LED display element
WO2022176382A1 (en) Touch sensor
WO2021246251A1 (en) Transfer film and method for producing multilayer body
CN115917430A (en) Transfer film and method for manufacturing laminate
TW202334748A (en) Transfer film, laminate having conductor pattern, production method for laminate having conductor pattern, production method for transfer film
JP2024052274A (en) Composition, transfer film, manufacturing method for laminate, cured film, and device
TW202212372A (en) Transfer film and layer production method
CN115943347A (en) Transfer film, method for manufacturing laminate, and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
TW202340304A (en) Photosensitive composition, transfer film, cured film, semiconductor package, pattern formation method, method for manufacturing semiconductor package